Skip to main content

Full text of "The Princeton Seminary Bulletin"

See other formats


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2016  with  funding  from 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary  Library 


4 


https  ://arch  i ve . org/detai  Is/pri  ncetonsem  i nar561 1 pri  n 


SESQUICENTENNIAL  YEAR  1812-1962 

/ v V' 

the  q 

PRINCETON 

SEMINARY 

BULLETIN 


Paradoxes  of  the  Ministry  Today 
All  Things  to  All  Men 
Kerygma  and  Discipleship 
Sermons: 

The  Light  of  Men 
Prophet  and  Priest,  But  Not  a 

Freedom  and  Tradition  in  Pastoral 

Renewal  Through  Witness 

Tillich’s  Science  of  Being 


King 

Theology 


Franklin  C.  Fry 
Jas.  I.  McCord 
Otto  A.  Piper 

H.  Ganse  Little 
Eugene  C.  Blake 

Seward  Hiltner 

George  W.  Webber 

Wm.  Hallock  Johnson 


VOLUME  LVI,  NUMBER  1 
OCTOBER  1962 


PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  SEMINARY 


Jas.  I.  .McCord 
President 

BOARD  OF  TRUSTEES 

Peter  K.  Emmons,  President  John  M.  Templeton,  Vice-President 

Frederick  E.  Christian,  Secretary  George  W.  Loos,  Jr.,  Treasurer 

Manufacturers  Hanover  Trust  Company,  New  York,  N.Y.,  Assistant  Treasurer 


Arthur  M.  Adams 

J.  Keith  Louden 

Roland  W.  Anderson 

Thomas  M.  MacMillan 

Clem  E.  Bininger 

Joseph  E.  McCabe 

Eugene  Carson  Blake 

John  W.  Meister 

John  G.  Buchanan 

W.  Beverly  Murphy 

Ernest  T.  Campbell 

Mrs.  John  J.  Newberry 

Allan  M.  Frew 

Elmer  L.  Reynolds 

John  T.  Galloway 

William  H.  Scheide 

E.  Harris  Harbison 

H.  D.  Moore  Sherrerd 

Ralph  Cooper  Hutchison 

Laird  H.  Simons,  Jr. 

Weir  C.  Ketler 

W.  Sherman  Skinner 

Bryant  M.  Kirkland 

George  E.  Sweazey 

Harry  G.  Kuch 

Mrs.  Paul  Switz 

Raymond  I.  Lindquist 

Samuel  G.  Warr 

John  S.  Linen 
Edmund  P.  Lorenz 

TRUSTEES  EMERITI 

David  B.  Watermulder 

Richard  J.  Dearborn 

Wm.  Hallock  Johnson 

Benjamin  F.  Farber 

Albert  J.  McCartney 

Henry  Hird 

Mrs.  Charles  0.  Miller 

THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 

Donald  Macleod,  Editor 

Edward  J.  Jurji,  Book  Review  Editor 

The  Bulletin  is  published  quarterly  by  the  Trustees  of  the  Theological  Seminary 
of  the  United  Presbyterian  Church  at  Princeton,  New  Jersey.  Numbers  I,  2,  and  3 of 
each  volume  are  mailed  free  of  charge  to  all  alumni  and  on  an  exchange  basis  with 
various  institutions.  Number  4 in  the  series  is  the  annual  academic  catalogue  of  the 
Seminary  and  may  be  obtained  by  request  to  the  Office  of  the  Registrar. 

Second  class  postage  paid  at  Princeton,  N.J. 


The  Princeton  Seminary  Bulletin 

| VOL.  LVI  OCTOBER,  1962  Number  1 

I Donald  Macleod,  Editor  Edward  J.  Jurji,  Book  Review  Editor 


Paradoxes  of  the  Ministry  Today  Franklin  Clark  Fry  4 

All  Things  to  All  Men  Jas.  I.  McCord  12 


Kerygma  and  Discipleship  Otto  A.  Piper 

Sermons  : 

The  Light  of  Men  H.  Ganse  Little 

Prophet  and  Priest,  But  Not  a King  Eugene  C.  Blake 

Freedom  and  Tradition  in  Pastoral  Theology  Seward  Hiltner 

Renewal  through  Witness  George  W . Webber 

Tillich’s  Science  of  Being  W . Hallock  Johnson 


Book  Reviews  : 

Theology 

The  Church’s  Confession  under  Hitler,  by  A.  C.  Cochrane  Jas.  /.  McCord 

The  Second  Vatican  Council,  by  Henri  Daniel-Rops 
The  Council,  Reform  and  Reunion,  by  Hans  Kung 

Communism  and  the  Christian  Faith,  by  L.  de  Koster  Charles  C.  West 


Biblical 

The  Thanksgiving  Hymns,  by  Menahem  Mansoor  Charles  T.  Fritscli 

The  Royal  Psalms,  by  Keith  R.  Crim 

The  Scrolls  and  Christian  Origins,  by  Matthew  Black 

When  Israel  Came  Out  of  Egypt,  by  Gabriel  Hebert  Philip  C.  Hammond 

The  Patriarchal  Age,  by  G.  F.  Pfeiffer 

The  Phoenicians,  by  Donald  Harden  William  R.  Lane 

The  Birth  of  the  Christian  Religion  and  The  Origin  of  the 

New  Testament,  by  A.  F.  Loisy  Otto  A.  Piper 

Lists  of  Words  Occurring  Frequently  in  the  Coptic  New  Testament, 

by  B.  M.  Metzger  Wm.  F.  Albright 

Eleusis  and  the  Eleusinian  Mysteries,  by  G.  E.  Mylonas  Bruce  M.  Metzger 
Calvin’s  New  Testament  Commentaries,  Vol.  8 (Romans  and 

Thessalonians),  by  R.  Mackenzie  Georges  A.  Barrois 

Concordance  to  the  Distinctive  Greek  Text  of  Codex  Bezae, 

by  J.  D.  Yoder  jan  A_  Moir 


14 


21 

27 

33 

42 

52 


63 

63 

63 

65 


65 

66 
66 

67 

68 
68 

69 

69 

70 

71 
7i 


2 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


History 


On  the  Road  to  Christian  Unity,  by  Samuel  McC.  Cavert 
The  Ecumenical  Movement,  by  Norman  Goodall 
One  Great  Ground  of  Hope,  by  Henry  P.  Van  Dusen 
Freedom  and  Catholic  Power  in  Spain  and  Portugal, 
by  Paul  Blanshard 

The  Protestant  Search  for  Political  Realism,  1919-1941, 
by  Donald  B.  Meyer 

The  Christians  of  Korea,  by  Samuel  H.  Moffett 


Norman  V.  Hope  72 
72 

72 

73 

James  H.  Smylie  74 
/.  Christy  Wilson  76 


Practical  Theology 

The  Search  for  Meaning,  by  A.  J.  Ungersma 
Doctor  Sangster,  by  Paul  Sangster 
From  Out  of  the  West,  ed.  by  Paul  Jesse  Baird 
The  Christian  Answer,  by  George  E.  Sweazey 
Proclaiming  Christ  Today,  by  W.  Norman  Pittenger 


E.  G.  Homrighausen  76 
Donald  Macleod  77 


79 

79 


General 

Through  the  Valley  of  the  Kwai,  by  Ernest  Gordon  John  Killingcr  80 

Hear  the  Word : A Novel  about  Elijah  and  Elisha,  by  H.  Zador  81 


IN  THIS  ISSUE 


The  Sesquicentennial  Program  of  Princeton  Theological  Seminary  began 
with  a Service  of  Worship  in  the  First  Presbyterian  Church  on  April 
23,  1962,  with  Dr.  H.  Ganse  Little,  Minister  of  the  Presbyterian  Church, 
Pasadena,  California,  as  preacher.  Dr.  Little,  an  alumnus  of  the  Seminary, 
delivered  the  sermon,  “The  Light  of  Men,”  which  is  published  in  this  number 
of  The  Bulletin. 

The  150th  Commencement  brought  distinguished  churchmen  to  the  cam- 
pus: Dr.  Eugene  C.  Blake,  Stated  Clerk  of  the  General  Assembly  of  the 
United  Presbyterian  Church  and  an  alumnus  of  the  Seminary,  gave  the  Bac- 
calaureate Sermon,  “Prophet  and  Priest,  But  Not  a King.”  The  commence- 
ment address,  “Paradoxes  of  the  Ministry  Today”  was  delivered  by  Dr. 
Franklin  C.  Fry,  President,  The  United  Lutheran  Church  in  America  and 
Chairman  of  the  Central  Committee  of  the  World  Council  of  Churches.  A 
farewell  message  to  the  Graduating  Class,  “All  Things  to  All  Men,”  was 
given  by  Dr.  Jas.  I.  McCord,  the  President  of  the  Seminary. 

Two  papers  by  distinguished  members  of  the  Seminary  Faculty  are  in- 
cluded : “Kerygma  and  Discipleship,”  by  Dr.  Otto  A.  Piper,  who  retired  this 
year  after  twenty-five  years  as  Helen  P.  Manson  Professor  of  New  Testa- 
ment Literature  and  Exegesis.  “Freedom  and  Tradition  in  Pastoral  Theol- 
ogy” is  by  Dr.  Seward  Hiltner,  Professor  of  Theology  and  Personality.  Al- 
though this  article  was  written  some  years  ago  and  its  thesis  given  fuller 
treatment  in  his  Preface  to  Pastoral  Theology  (Abingdon,  1958),  Dr.  Hilt- 
ner has  seen  no  reason  to  alter  the  basic  point  of  view  advocated  and  explored. 

During  the  Institute  of  Theology  in  July,  1962,  the  general  theme  was 
“The  Holy  Spirit  in  the  Renewal  of  the  Church.”  An  address,  “Renewal 
through  Witness,”  delivered  by  Reverend  George  W.  Webber,  Minister  of 
the  East  Harlem  Protestant  Parish,  New  York,  as  part  of  a series,  is  pub- 
lished in  response  to  many  requests. 

Of  unusual  interest  to  Princeton  alumni  will  be  the  article,  “Tillich’s  Sci- 
ence of  Being,”  by  William  Hallock  Johnson.  Dr.  Johnson  is  one  of  the  oldest 
living  alumni  of  the  Seminary,  Class  of  1896.  After  a distinguished  career  as 
scholar  and  teacher,  he  served  as  President  of  Lincoln  University  until  his 
retirement  in  1936.  Although  he  is  now  in  his  ninety-seventh  year,  he  main- 
tains a lively  interest  in  theological  and  philosophical  studies  and  from  within 
the  context  of  a former  generation  he  evaluates  the  fresh  concepts  of  the  new. 


D.M. 


PARADOXES  OF  THE  MINISTRY  TODAY 


Franklin  Clark  Fry 


As  a far  more  distinguished  voice 
. than  mine  has  already  reminded 
this  Sesquicentennial  celebration,  in  the 
kind  of  world  in  which  we  live,  the  para- 
dox is  becoming  an  increasingly  apt  fig- 
ure of  speech  and  more  and  more  fits  real- 
ity around  us,  to  which,  after  all,  a living 
language  is  designed  to  correspond. 
Right  in  every-day  affairs,  who  of  us  is 
not  acquainted  with  the  way,  in  fact  the 
inevitability  with  which  we  find  our- 
selves reduced  to  contradictions  every 
time  we  set  out  to  speak  of  the  pro- 
founder things  of  character ; of  love  and 
hate,  of  commitment  and  self-centered- 
ness, even  of  generosity  and  thrift?  No 
sooner  do  we  turn  the  first  corner  than 
we  find  our  feet  snared  in  riddles  and 
our  tongues  beginning  to  speak  in  para- 
doxes. 

“Absence  makes  the  heart  grow  fond- 
er,” is  emphatically,  often  painfully  true, 
as  a chronic  itinerant  like  me  who  is 
doomed  to  wander  the  face  of  the  earth 
almost  as  much  as  a certain  character 
mentioned  in  the  first  chapter  of  Job — 
although,  I hope,  to  a better  purpose — 
can  testify.  Yet,  simultaneously,  who 
can  deny  that  the  opposite  adage  is  no 
less  so?  In  the  absorption  of  any  mo- 
ment, in  concentration  on  the  task  at 
hand ; as  for  example  right  where  we 
are  now  : “out  of  sight”  does  mean  “out 
of  mind.” 

“A  penny  saved” — no  doubt  about  it 
— is  still  “a  penny  earned”  but  in  the 
next  flash  it  too  is  cancelled  out  by  an 
equally  sensible  warning  how  perilously 


easy  it  is  to  be  “penny  wise  and  pound 
foolish.”  And  so  it  goes  on. 

It  is  hardly  surprising  that  when  we 
move  over  into  the  realm  of  sacred 
things,  the  incidence  instantly  becomes 
much,  much  higher.  That  is  predictable 
when  life  is  looked  at  in  depth  and  at  the 
same  time  in  its  totality;  life  which  by 
its  very  nature  defies  being  captured  in  a 
simple  statement  or  comprehended  in 
what  after  all  can  only  be  a single  re- 
flection from  one  of  the  facets  of  what 
God  himself  has  made  a sparkling  prism 
with  many  sides.  It  is  dramatic  how  the 
New  Testament  bristles,  or  if  you  pre- 
fer, glistens  with  paradoxes. 

“He  who  is  not  with  me  is  against 
me,”  the  Master  flatly  declared,  but  lis- 
ten to  his  very  same  voice  in  the  morn- 
ing when  the  disciples  reported  to  him 
that  a man  casting  out  devils  in  his 
name  would  not  follow  them : “Forbid 
him  not  . . . for  he  that  is  not  against 
us  is  on  our  side.”  Both  on  the  same  su- 
preme authority  are  so  completely  con- 
tradictory but  incontestably  true.  “Bear 
ye  one  another’s  burdens”  precedes  by 
only  three  verses,  “Every  man  shall  bear 
his  own  burden.”  We  are  to  love  the 
Lord  our  God  with  all  our  hearts,  and 
precisely  at  the  instant  when  a man  does 
not  have  even  a tiny  corner  of  his  heart 
left  with  which  to  do  it,  he  is  to  love  his 
neighbor  as  himself.  The  Kingdom  of 
God  itself,  we  are  told,  is  simultaneously 
within  us,  in  the  intimate,  private  realm 
of  personal  piety ; and  among  us,  in  the 
complicated  and  compromising  world  of 
our  relations  with  other  people ; without 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


5 


even  a shade  of  difference  in  the  Greek 
preposition  to  give  us  a hint  of  the  tran- 
sition. 

The  Christian  man,  looking  inward,  is 
justified  by  faith  and  yet  at  the  very  mo- 
ment of  his  ecstasy  at  realizing  it,  with 
a chill  he  finds  himself  still  in  the  bonds 
- of  sin  and  in  need  of  constant  repentance. 

It  is  no  wonder  that  II  Corinthians  6 
is  such  a classic : sorrowful,  yet  always 
rejoicing;  chastened  and  not  killed;  dy- 
ing and  behold  we  live  ! It  could  be  mul- 
tiplied many  times.  It  has  in  it  the  juice 
and  the  essence  of  truth. 

In  this  spirit  and  against  all  this  mon- 
tage of  memory,  I am  venturing  to  speak 
to  you  at  these  Commencement  exercises 
on  “Paradoxes  of  the  Ministry  Today.” 
I do  so  because  I believe  that  the  subject 
itself  is  worthy  of  being  dignified  by  be- 
ing cast  in  this  form  and  because  aside 
from  everything  else,  I hope  the  very 
shape  of  this  address,  with  the  hooks  at- 
tached to  it,  may  snag  the  fabric  of  your 
minds  and  attract  you  to  listen  to  what 
I have  to  say.  Four  such  paradoxes  in 
all  will  define  the  bony  structure  of  all 
that  follows. 

I 

The  first,  inevitably,  is : we  live  in  an 
age  in  which  the  Gospel  that  we  preach 
must  be  relevant  but,  woe  be  to  us  and 
to  our  children,  if  it  is  not  also  timeless. 
“Relevant,”  without  doubt,  is  the  catch- 
word of  our  day ; more  deeply  than  that, 
we  have  recognized  in  it  no  less  than  a 
divine  imperative — and  so  we  should. 
As  every  observer  and  above  all  every 
participant  must  realize,  it  has  become 
the  touchstone  of  church  life  everywhere 
in  1962.  There  is  no  question,  to  begin 
with,  of  that  being  true  of  the  pyramid- 
ing councils  of  churches  that  we  have 


organized  in  our  time  and  that  are  so 
expressive  of  the  mood  of  our  genera- 
tion. It  is  not  too  much  to  say  that  it 
has  become  so  much  a predilection  in 
them  that  it  has  almost  turned  into  a 
fixation. 

The  world  is  hungry,  although  it  has 
to  be  admitted,  very  possibly  it  is  no 
more  so  than  it  has  always  been  ; and  we 
unlike  our  fathers,  feel  an  overwhelming 
new  compulsion,  we  have  a sharpened 
conscience  to  feed  it.  As  an  organic  re- 
sult, what  may  be  the  most  distinctive 
and  revealing  new  dimension  of  twenti- 
eth century  Christianity — as  distinctive 
and  revealing  in  its  way  as  the  mission- 
ary movement  was  for  the  nineteenth — 
has  come  into  being,  first  in  the  form  of 
inter-church  aid,  now  flowering  into 
community  development,  with  relief 
supplies  indiscriminately  for  all. 

Racial  tensions  erupt  and  at  once  we 
rush  off  to  a Cottesloe  Conference  in 
South  Africa  and  are  at  any  rate  begin- 
ning, if  only  barely  beginning,  to  show 
fruits  meet  for  repentance  at  home. 

Because  peace  is  so  maddeningly, 
frustratingly  elusive,  we  marshal  our 
wits  with  that  much  greater  determina- 
tion to  see  how  we  can  make  our  Chris- 
tian insights  impinge  directly  at  the 
places  where  the  life-and-death  deci- 
sions are  being  forged. 

The  more  life  as  a whole  appears  like 
a runaway  juggernaut,  the  more  firmly 
we  have  the  conviction  and  the  resolve 
that  our  Christ  must  be  at  the  controls. 

The  same  sentiment,  I do  not  need  to 
labor  it,  is  spreading  conspicuously  and 
healthily  also  in  congregational  life, 
with  the  accent  increasingly  on  laymen 
precisely  in  their  secular  vocations  as 
the  salt  which  needs  to  permeate  the 
structures  of  society  and  the  light  which 


6 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


ought  to  shine,  if  need  be  in  the  midst 
of  darkness — and  that  is  admirable  too. 
Indeed,  nothing  less  will  do.  We  have 
come  to  have  a right  instinct  that  the 
divine  drama  of  salvation  is  not  to  be 
regarded  only  as  a spectacle  to  be 
gawked  at  by  us  as  spectators.  It  needs 
to  be  made  operative,  pervasive,  effec- 
tive in  the  swirling  and  seething  world 
around  us  in  these  days,  which  is  not 
only  too  much  with  us  but  which  would 
otherwise  speedily  be  too  much  for  us. 

The  Gospel — on  this  much  we  twen- 
tieth century  Christians  are  agreed — 
must  have  the  smell  of  reality  about  it. 
But,  never  forget,  before  it  can  get  that 
odor  it  must  overridingly  be  real.  To  fit 
in  time,  above  all  before  it  can  trans- 
form time — don’t  let  anyone  ever  over- 
look it — it  has  to  be  timeless. 

Granted,  its  preachers  are  to  be  the 
servants  of  men  whom  God  so  loved — 
that  is  indispensable — but  exactly  for 
that  reason  they  must  first  utterly  be 
the  servants  of  God,  who  have  Jesus 
only  in  the  focus  of  their  eyes.  We  must 
never  allow  the  music  of  our  religion  to 
be  set  so  to  the  metronome  of  this  world 
that  anyone  can  ever  fail  to  hear  in  it 
the  strains  of  eternity. 

Right  there  is  our  besetting  tempta- 
tion. It  is  possible,  in  fact  it  has  re- 
peatedly happened,  that  we  can  con- 
centrate so  much  on  applying  our  Chris- 
tianity that  we  all  but  forget  to  teach 
our  people  and  even  to  remind  ourselves 
what  it  is. 

A hush  fell  over  a recent  meeting  of 
the  World  Council  of  Churches’  execu- 
tive committee  when  one  of  our  col- 
leagues, a scholarly  woman,  read  from  a 
galley  sheet  of  a forthcoming  study  book 
for  a conference  on  Christian  education 
this  searching  paragraph  which  states 


the  case  in  what  may  be  an  extreme 
form : 

“To  many  people  in  the  west  such  is 
the  emphasis  upon  progress  and  the 
production  of  more  goods  and  services 
that  it  seems  beside  the  point  to  worry 
about  one’s  self  with  questions  that  are 
too  big  for  definite  answers  anyway. 
What  is  life  for?  Is  death  the  end  of 
everything?  Does  a God  exist  and  is  he 
good?  Common  sense — and  the  scien- 
tific spirit  too — suggest  that  it  is  wiser 
to  concentrate  on  facts  and  to  apply  our 
knowledge  to  finite  situations.  Why 
bother  to  ask  unanswerable  questions? 
Facts  are  safe  enough  ; but  vague  specu- 
lation and  chasing  the  heart’s  desires  are 
not,  and  so  in  a technological  world 
many  questions  are  left  not  merely  un- 
answered but  unasked.” 

All  this  means  that  no  matter  how 
great  our  zeal  for  relevance  is ; honor- 
able, even  indispensable  rightly  seen  as 
an  extension  of  our  Lord’s  own  coming 
into  this  world,  as  it  may  be ; it  must 
always  be  balanced  by — a better  word 
is  bathed  in — an  overwhelming,  all- 
pervasive,  transfiguring  consciousness 
of  the  incarnate  Son  Himself,  who  has 
revealed  to  us  the  Father.  No  amount 
of  external  activity  must  ever  be  al- 
lowed to  mask,  especially  from  our- 
selves, impoverishment  in  the  inner  cita- 
del of  the  soul. 

No  river  can  stream  out  to  fructify 
life  outside  except  as  a fountain  of  liv- 
ing water  has  first  sprung  up  within  me 
and  you,  within  our  minds,  our  hearts 
and  all  our  being  which  flows  to  e- 
ternal  life. 

All  of  this  brings  sharply  back  to  me 
an  indelible  scene  from  my  own  past  to 
which  I hope  you  will  pardon  my  refer- 
ring. At  a meeting  of  the  Central  Com- 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


7 


mittee  of  the  World  Council  of  Churches 
at  Lucknow  more  than  a decade  ago,  to 
our  shocked  surprise  a high  official  of 
the  Indian  government  who  had  come 
as  our  guest  that  took  it  upon  himself 
to  read  us  a brusque  lecture  on  the  role 
that  he  insisted  that  missionaries  should 
assume  from  then  on.  His  country,  he 
admitted  in  what  sounded  almost  like  a 
tone  of  condescension,  had  benefited 
from  the  schools  and  had  appreciated 
the  hospitals  that  had  been  established, 
and  indeed  the  principal  reason  why  he 
was  present  was  to  give  a proper  ac- 
knowledgment. But  having  said  that, 
in  the  very  same  breath,  he  went  on  in 
a suddenly  harsh  tone,  Never  again 
would  there  be  room  for  proselytization. 
It  was  an  offensive  kind  of  cultural  im- 
perialism ; it  had  to  stop.  Missionaries 
from  that  time  on  ought  to  confine 
themselves  to  human  betterment — in  the 
jargon  of  today  he  might  as  well  have 
said  to  things  relevant  to  the  actualities 
of  life— in  order  to  be  accepted. 

When  the  time  came  for  me  as  pre- 
siding officer  to  reply,  it  was  clear  what 
I had  to  say.  The  gist  of  it  simply  was 
that  we  Christians  had  come  to  India  as 
friends  and  a mark  of  a friend  is  that  he 
feels  no  less  than  a compulsion  in  his 
heart  to  share  his  best.  Clinics  and  col- 
leges are  good  and  we  have  been  glad 
to  give  them,  but,  good  as  they  are,  the 
minds  they  train  will  be  empty;  the 
lives  they  preserve  can  even  be  a mock- 
ery if  it  all  ends  there.  The  best  is  the 
joy  that  can  be  bright  only  as  it  flames 
from  peace  of  soul,  a peace  which  in 
turn  can  be  steady  and  serene  only  when 
it  issues  from  hope,  that  hope  which  is 
fruit  that  grows  only  on  the  vine  of  a 
living  faith.  This,  our  finest,  if  we  are 
true  friends,  we  can  not  withhold. 


II 

The  second  of  the  four  paradoxes  can 
be  dealt  with  somewhat  more  summa- 
rily; but  who  can  say  that  we  do  not 
equally  feel  its  pinch  right  where  we 
are?  It  is  this.  The  Church,  with  no 
apologies  at  all,  is  an  institution,  but  you 
and  I must  ever  be  on  the  alert  to  guard 
it  against  the  diseases  to  which  institu- 
tions are  prone.  I confess  to  having  no 
sympathy  with  those  who  throw  the 
word  around  these  days  as  if  it  were  an 
insulting  epithet,  a kind  of  popular 
sneer.  I do  not  understand  them  at  all, 
especially  where  they  turn  out  to  be  the 
same  people,  as  they  surprisingly  often 
do,  who  in  the  next  minute  are  the  loud- 
est in  lamenting  the  sinfulness  of  our  di- 
visions. One  is  tempted  to  ask,  divisions 
of  what?  Not  of  the  corpus  Christi 
mysticum,  of  course,  but  precisely  of  the 
institution  that  they  started  out  to  de- 
plore. When  will  they  learn  that  they 
simply  cannot  have  it  both  ways?  If 
there  is  to  be  a manifested  unity,  it 
must  be  in  an  earthly  frame. 

What  bald  inconsistency  they  show ! 
Nowhere  else  in  life  is  there  the  slight- 
est disposition  to  prevent  any  other 
emotion  or  sentiment  from  taking  a 
bodily  form  to  give  it  effect.  We  look  on 
it  as  the  most  natural  and  laudable 
thing  in  the  world.  Where  is  the  logic 
to  make  Christian  faith  the  one  and  only 
exception?  Nobody  objects  when  family 
affection  issues  in  the  home,  its  cor- 
responding institution.  More  emphati- 
cally than  that,  every  time  you  and  I 
have  met  a man  who  professed  a devo- 
tion to  the  one  but  refused  to  support 
the  other,  we  have  known  he  was  in- 
sincere. It  would  be  grotesque  to  pro- 
test admiration  for  justice  but  cry  down 


8 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


the  law  courts,  and  ridiculous  to  pretend 
to  compassion  for  the  sick  but  reject 
hospitals.  Culture  self-evidently  requires 
universities  and  everyone  knows  that 
the  benevolent  impulses  of  a city  would 
be  reduced  to  ineffectiveness  without 
the  equivalent  of  a community  chest.  At 
the  very  peak  of  it  all,  just  try  to  imag- 
ine a man  being  patriotic  apart  from  a 
state ! 

“All  public  spirit,”  Elihu  Root  was 
right,  “all  the  noblest  emotions  that 
move  the  best  of  mankind  are  futile  ex- 
cept through  the  creation  of  institutions 
to  give  them  effect.”  That  is  no  less  so 
also,  without  any  cavil  about  it,  of 
Christianity  and  the  institutional 
church. 

At  the  same  time,  we  who  love  the 
church,  I in  a church  bureaucracy  and 
you  who  are  just  entering  its  ministry 
— agreed ! — must  be  argus-eyed  by 
night  and  day  to  guard  it  against  the 
temptations,  the  infirmities  that  come 
exactly  from  the  fact  that  it  has  a body. 

As  a descendant  of  the  Reformation, 
I would  be  among  the  last  to  be  blind 
to  that,  knowing  that  the  Reformation 
was  not  only  450  years  ago  but  must 
be  perpetual.  The  weight  of  the  flesh 
can  subtly  stifle  the  spirit ! Thanks  to 
the  busy  organizational  beavers  in  the 
church,  what  was  meant  to  be  a channel 
of  grace  can  so  easily  be  dammed  up 
and  turned  into  a self-contained  arti- 
ficial lake.  The  body  of  Christ  can  grow 
to  be  so  fascinated  at  its  own  physical 
processes  that  it  can  forget  to  live  for 
the  One  in  whom  and  for  whom  it  ex- 
ists. Good  in  itself,  it  is  in  constant  peril 
of  deflecting  our  loyalty  from  the  Best. 
Our  sonship  toward  the  church,  our 
mother,  must  never  cast  a shadow  on 
our  sonship  toward  God,  our  Father. 


Ill 

The  institution  and  the  needed  vigi- 
lance are  the  opposite  poles  in  the  sec- 
ond paradox ; the  third,  which  you  will 
see  at  a glance  constitutes  just  as  tight 
a fit  in  our  time,  is  between  the  twin 
calls  to  today’s  minister  to  be  penitent 
and  yet  affirmative.  We  Christians  have 
a built-in  disadvantage  in  our  struggle 
against  any  adversaries  by  being  hob- 
bled by  the  sense  of  our  guilt;  and 
seldom  has  it  been  more  apparent  than 
now.  Speaking  humanly,  it  can  be  car- 
ried so  far  that  we  can  be  lamed  by  our 
introspection.  We  can  even  come  close 
to  being  palsied  by  the  depressing 
knowledge  of  our  imperfections  as  we 
see  them  in  the  light  of  God.  In  a life- 
and-death  contest  like  the  one  in  which 
we  are  engaged  today  with  ruthless  an- 
tagonists who  are  completely  extro- 
verted and  never  deterred  by  the  slight- 
est scruple  or  self-doubts,  there  are 
moments  when  this  can  almost  seem  too 
heavy  a handicap.  Of  course,  it  never  is 
actually  as  bad  as  that.  At  any  rate, 
come  what  may,  we  must  not  give  up 
penitence  at  any  cost.  We  cannot  and 
remain  Christian. 

A man  does  not  have  to  reduce  him- 
self to  an  animal  in  order  to  grapple 
with  an  animal;  in  fact  he  forfeits  his 
advantage  if  he  does  so.  Similarly  in  the 
warfare  of  the  spirit  the  Christian  can 
never  afford  to  be  less  than  himself. 

But  there  are  two  other  things  that 
he  cannot  afford  either.  One,  quickly, 
is  to  have  any  doubts  about  the  sword 
in  his  hand.  I am  told  that  it  is  the 
fashion  nowadays  in  some  quarters  to 
speculate  what  would  have  happened  if 
the  Reformation  doctrine  of  the  corrup- 
tion of  our  characters  by  sin  so  that  we 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


9 


can  no  longer  trust  our  motives  had  ex- 
tended to  the  mind  so  that  we  could  no 
more  trust  our  beliefs.  Thank  God  it 
didn’t!  The  Gospel,  the  power  of  God 
delivered  by  him  into  our  grip,  would 
otherwise  fall  loosely  from  our  hands. 
Relying  solely  on  our  own  tentative,  un- 
certain, hypothetical,  speculative,  grop- 
ing thoughts  can  lead  only  to  paralysis. 

Certainly  this  is  not  what  we  have 
learned  from  our  eponymous  confes- 
sional ancestors  Calvin  and  Luther,  or 
from  Paul  and  John.  By  the  grace  of 
Christ  and  his  Spirit,  we  have  tem- 
pered steel  in  our  grasp  that  insures 
victory ; we  must  never  allow  it  to  be 
wrenched  from  us  by  anyone  alive. 

A still  more  sinister  danger,  which 
has  the  added  disadvantage  of  being 
even  more  prevalent  in  these  days,  is 
that  unless  we  watch  out,  what  starts  in 
a right  way  as  healthy  penitence  can  so 
quickly  degenerate  into  a negative  de- 
featism. It  is  one  of  the  endemic  dis- 
eases of  the  1960’s  that  that  so  often 
happens.  One  way  to  account  for  it  is  as 
perhaps  an  unconscious  outcropping  of 
the  deep-going  pessimism  of  these  years. 
Since  it  is  regarded  as  the  next  thing 
to  subversive  to  let  discouragement 
show  through  in  other  areas  of  life, 
many  people  compensate  by  doing  so  in 
religion  where  it  has  the  extra  virtue  of 
sounding  pious  and  high-principled.  Or, 
at  other  times,  it  may  be  only  an  in- 
stinctive reflection  of  the  national  mood 
that  has  made  almost  an  idol  of  broad- 
mindedness. There  is  a common  feel- 
ing nowadays  that  it  is  necessary  as  a 
kind  of  lubrication  in  a pluralistic  so- 
ciety for  everybody  to  be  so  aware  of 
his  shortcomings  that  nobody  will  feel 
justified  in  acting  very  sure  of  himself, 


especially  in  matters  of  faith.  Positive- 
ness, where  any  is  allowed  to  exist,  is 
to  be  reserved  for  political  and  social 
opinions ; and  no  doubt  about  it,  it  has 
been.  Honestly  it  makes  me  feel  almost 
sick  to  see  how  weakly  too  many  Chris- 
tians have  gotten  into  the  habit  of  yield- 
ing to  this  trend. 

Whatever  the  causes,  it  is  high  time 
that  there  is  an  end  to  it;  to  all  the 
dreary  business  of  rehearsing  lists  of 
obvious  failures  which  has  almost  mas- 
ochisticly  become  a kind  of  Protestant 
specialty  in  recent  years ; an  end  to  the 
field  day  for,  if  not  false,  then  misguided 
friends  to  slur  at  everything  the  church 
does  as  mediocre,  offering  what  nobody 
wants,  prosaic,  dull.  If  we  do  not  take 
care,  we  shall  come  dangerously  near 
to  talking  ourselves  into  despondency, 
a strange  aberration  indeed  for  those 
with  an  invincible  Lord. 

Be  of  good  cheer,  my  friend,  the 
church  of  the  living  God  is  not  becom- 
ing unstuck  or  falling  to  pieces.  Peni- 
tence is  well  enough  but  affirmativeness 
is  equally  needed  to  strike  the  balance 
of  truth.  Built  on  a rock,  by  His  grace 
she  still  stands  and  I can  rejoice  in  her, 
the  foreshadowing  of  my  Father’s 
house,  the  fountain  from  which  I can 
drink  and  be  refreshed,  the  table  of 
forgiveness,  the  tower  of  refuge,  the 
divinely  prepared  training-ground  for 
my  soul.  If  the  Holy  Spirit  dwells  in 
us,  one  test  is  that  He  will  not  speak 
with  a cracked  voice ! 

IV 

And  now,  in  only  a few  bold  strokes, 
for  the  final  paradox,  which  is  in  many 
ways  the  most  personal,  addressed  di- 
rectly to  those  who  stand  at  the  brink 
of  going  out  into  today’s  ministry,  Put 


10 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


the  Gospel  of  obedience  ahead  of  the 
Gospel  of  success.  Sometimes  there  is 
an  antithesis,  a dramatic  oppositeness, 
between  these  two  also.  More  than  once 
you  will  find  yourselves  confronted  with 
a straight-out  choice. 

There  are  few  people  alive  with 
whom  I have  less  patience  than  those 
— and  some  prominent  and  formidable 
figures  are  numbered  among  them — 
who  would  like,  often  unconsciously,  to 
twist  the  Kingdom  of  God  to  serve  sec- 
ondary ends.  Granted  that  when  Chris- 
tianity is  planted  in  men’s  hearts  and 
flourishes  in  a land,  law  and  order  be- 
come more  secure  and  juvenile  delin- 
quency is  on  the  wane.  We  thank  God 
for  it  and  should  count  them  as  appreci- 
ated by-products,  but  one  would  have  a 
distorted  focus  if  he  imagines  that  they 
are  what  our  faith  in  God  through 
Christ  is  primarily  for,  the  one  thing 
that  it  is  designed  to  do.  Nor — dare  I 
say  it? — is  the  free  enterprise  system, 
not  even  the  defense  of  democracy,  high- 
ly as  I esteem  one  and  devoted  from 
the  depths  of  my  being  as  I am  to  the 
other.  The  best  that  can  be  said  is  that 
democratic  institutions  have  more  often 
than  not  come  like  a natural  flowering 
wherever  the  Christian  faith  has  first 
been  firmly  rooted  in  men’s  lives.  The 
main  aim,  towering  above  all  the  rest, 
single  and  unique,  is  none  of  these.  It 
is  so  much  higher  than  all  the  others 
that  it  soars  above  them.  It  is  simply 
to  raise  frail  men  to  the  stature  of  sons 
of  God.  It  is  to  feed  hungry  hearts ; to 
give  a footing  to  those  who  would  fall 
on  which  they  can  rise.  It  is  for  that 
that  so  God  loved  the  world.  For  that 
we  are  called  and  must  render  our  obe- 
dience. 

Even  if  the  pitfall  of  secondary  aims 


is  avoided,  once  we  are  wholly  given  to 
the  primary  work  of  the  church,  even 
then  we  are  not  yet  safe.  One  more  net 
lies  seductively  in  the  path  of  every  min- 
ister today  to  which  I call  on  you  to  be 
alert.  It  is  the  most  insinuating  tempta- 
tion of  all : to  j udge  what  ought  to  be 
our  ministry  in  spiritual  things  by  the 
entirely  foreign  yardsticks  of  this  world. 

It  is  frightening  to  see  the  subtle  kind 
of  osmosis  that  brings  secular  standards 
right  into  the  house  of  God. 

In  matters  of  church  union — I know 
because  I am  right  now  engaged  in  one 
— you  can  guess  what  is  the  most  fre- 
quently asked  question.  It  is : How 
much  heightened  prestige  will  it  bring? 
Or  what  will  be  the  increase  in  effi- 
ciency? Or  how  will  it  build  a stronger 
front  against  a named  rival  ? All  of  that 
is  oddly  off  the  point.  For  shame  on 
those  who  ask  and  on  anyone  who  even 
calculates  an  answer.  When  will  our 
proud  hearts  learn  that  His  motives  are 
not  prudential  as  ours  too  often  are, 
that  God  refuses  to  be  cramped  into  our 
mean  ambitions,  that  the  only  test  is 
that  His  will  shall  be  done  ? 

The  same  thing  will  be  true  where- 
ever  you  serve,  bitter  as  it  is  for  the 
old  Adam  to  learn  it.  If  it  is  in  a foreign 
field,  the  decisive  factor  is  not  where 
we  are  tempted  to  look  for  it,  in  the 
fertility  of  the  soil.  Our  missionary  ef- 
fort cannot  one  day  longer  indulge  in 
the  illusion  that  it  is  cultivating  spiritu- 
al provinces  for  the  glory  of  the  church 
back  home.  If  anyone  does  that,  he  is 
disqualified  at  once.  Those  days,  for  the 
health  of  our  souls,  are  dead  and  gone 
forever.  The  one,  the  only  thing  that 
will  matter — Oh,  when  will  we  learn  it  ? 
— is  abandon  in  his  obedience. 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


ii 


And  in  America,  America  which  is 
no  longer  out  of  this  world  but  embar- 
rassingly a part  of  it,  it  will  be  no  dif- 
ferent. Here  at  home  just  as  truly,  one 
after  another,  the  old  marks  of  success, 
which  used  to  be  such  a tempting  coun- 
terfeit of  a spiritual  service  of  God,  are 
i being  exposed  as  shoddy  too.  What  we 
used  to  call  progress,  the  tangible  things 
that  could  be  dehydrated  into  impres- 
sive statistics,  have  frighteningly  but 
salutarily  begun  to  be  shaken — and  it  is 
good  that  they  have.  The  most  settled 
parish  that  you  can  enter  into  has  be- 
come a testing  frontier  where  a man 
needs  to  venture  in  faith.  My  prayer  is 
that  God  will  grant  that  true  values  will 


shine  in  your  eyes  as  in  his ! The  Lord 
take  the  charm  for  you  from  the  copper 
of  success  and  sublimate  it  in  your  lives 
into  the  gold  of  obedience. 

The  Gospel  relevant  and  timeless. 
The  Church  rightly  an  institution  but 
needing  to  be  protected  against  the  ill- 
nesses to  which,  as  an  institution,  it  is 
altogether  too  prone.  Our  witness  peni- 
tent but  unflinchingly  affirmative.  Your 
lives  not  obeying  in  order  to  succeed 
but  winning  through  to  the  only  true 
success  in  Christ’s  ministry,  that  which 
comes  from  a quiet  obedience  to  our 
Lord. 

God  speed  you  as  you  go  and  this 
noble  school  as  it  lives  on ! 


SESQUICENTENNIAL 

LECTURESHIPS 

November  12-16 , 1962 

THE  L.  P.  STONE  LECTURESHIP 
The  Reverend  Paul  L.  Lehmann,  Th.D.,  D.D. 

THE  STUDENTS’  LECTURESHIP  ON  MISSIONS 
The  Reverend  John  A.  Mackay,  D.D.,  LL.D.,  Litt.D. 


THE  ANNIE  KINKEAD  WARFIELD  LECTURESHIP 
The  Reverend  Kenneth  J.  Foreman,  Ph.D.,  D.D. 


ALL  THINGS  TO  ALL  MEN 

Jas.  I.  McCord 


It  is  not  possible  for  me  to  address 
the  Sesquicentennial  Class  of  Prince- 
ton Theological  Seminary  without  be- 
ginning on  a personal  note.  You  and  I 
came  to  Princeton  in  the  fall  of  1959, 
all  of  us  juniors,  and  many  of  you  were 
in  my  first  class  here.  From  that  Sep- 
tember when  we  began  with  the  theol- 
ogy of  the  pre-Socratics,  I have  had  a 
feeling  of  genuine  solidarity  with  you, 
and  to  you  I owe  a great  debt  of  grati- 
tude. I salute  you  as  you  enter  the  min- 
istry of  the  Church  of  Jesus  Christ,  and 
I am  confident  that  the  life  of  the 
Church  will  be  enriched  by  your  gifts 
and  by  your  commitment. 

Let  my  words  of  farewell  be  very 
brief.  They  begin  with  verses  from  St. 
Paul’s  first  Corinthian  letter : 

For  though  I be  free  from  all  men, 
yet  have  I made  myself  servant 
unto  all,  that  I might  gain  the 
more. 

And  unto  the  Jews  I became  as  a 
Jew,  that  I might  gain  the  Jews; 
to  them  that  are  under  the  law,  as 
under  the  law,  that  I might  gain 
them  that  are  under  the  law ; 

To  them  that  are  without  law,  as 
without  law,  (being  not  without 
law  to  God,  but  under  the  law  to 
Christ),  that  I might  gain  them 
that  are  without  law. 

To  the  weak  became  I as  weak,  that 
I might  gain  the  weak : I am  made 
all  things  to  all  men,  that  I might 
by  all  means  save  some. 


And  this  I do  for  the  gospel’s  sake, 
that  I might  be  partaker  thereof 
with  you. 

(I  Corinthians  9:19-23) 

Canon  Warren  has  called  this  “the 
most  dangerous  program  ever  adum- 
brated,’’ and  I am  suggesting  that  no 
less  dangerous  program  will  be  worthy 
of  your  ministry.  The  most  urgent  ques- 
tion you  will  meet  the  moment  your 
ministry  moves  out  of  the  shelter  of  the 
Church  into  the  world  is  how  is  Chris- 
tian witness  possible  today  in  a world 
that  is  rapidly  being  reshaped  into  an 
order  that  is  closed  and  one-dimen- 
sional. And,  further,  what  is  the  nature 
of  this  witness  which  in  Christ’s  name 
we  bear  ? 

These  bold  words  of  St.  Paul  de- 
scribe the  nature  of  his  witness.  It  be- 
gan with  his  entering  into  the  experi- 
ences of  those  around  him,  with  his 
becoming  “all  things  to  all  men,”  and 
with  his  making  their  experiences  his 
own.  He  was  not  afraid  of  the  world. 
He  understood  that  his  own  witness  to 
the  power  of  the  Gospel  was  possible  at 
the  price  of  his  becoming  one  with  all 
conditions  of  men,  for  only  then  could 
he  make  their  questions  his  questions 
and  avoid  the  risk  of  supplying  solutions 
to  problems  no  longer  being  raised. 

Wasn’t  it  Gertrude  Stein,  when  on 
her  death  bed,  who  turned  to  her  friend 
Alice  Toklas  and  asked,  “Alice,  what  is 
the  answer?”  Alice  looked  at  her  sadly 
and  said,  “Gertrude,  I am  afraid  we 
don’t  know.”  After  a long  pause,  Miss 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


13 


Stein  said,  “Well,  then,  Alice,  what  is 
the  question?” 

The  question,  after  all,  is  the  im- 
portant thing.  It  is  cheap  and  easy  to 
give  glib  answers  to  old  questions,  to 
inquiries  no  longer  made,  and  to  prob- 
lems our  fathers  solved,  and  to  refuse 
to  pay  the  price  of  learning  the  agoniz- 
ingly real  questions  that  are  being  asked 
by  your  contemporaries.  You  will  want 
to  deal  with  more  than  surface  symp- 
toms which  may  be  met  with  half 
truths  and  partial  answers.  You  will 


want  to  probe  the  depths  of  man’s  be- 
ing, where  he  becomes  aware  of  the 
problems  of  life  and  death.  And  you 
will  not  know  all  the  answers,  but  you 
may  have  every  assurance  that  by  giv- 
ing prior  attention  to  the  questions,  you 
will  be  in  a position  to  trust  the  Holy 
Spirit  to  supply  the  answers  in  your 
own  ministry. 

May  the  peace  of  God,  which  passeth 
all  understanding,  keep  your  hearts  and 
minds  through  Christ  Jesus. 


The  Gospels  see  everything  against  the  background  of  that  final  consummation  which  will 
bring  the  labored  story  of  human  life  to  its  close,  and  which  waits  from  day  to  day  only 
the  hidden  counsels  of  God.  Indeed,  from  Genesis  to  Revelation  the  end  is  always  there.  It 
is  the  context  of  every  book,  the  undertone  of  every  hallelujah.  But  it  is  not  there  as 
catastrophe ; certainly  not  as  meaningless  catastrophe,  canceling  every  item  of  the  past  and 
present,  reducing  it  all  to  dust  and  nothingness.  It  is  there  as  victory — that  victory  which 
the  death  and  resurrection  of  Jesus  Christ  celebrate  and,  to  say  the  whole  truth,  inaugurate, 
in  the  very  face  of  life’s  dismal  word  finished.  It  is  there  to  solemnize  every  beginning,  to 
read  every  chapter  as  if  there  were  no  other,  to  see  in  all  days  the  last  days,  to  turn  history 
itself  into  one  great  now  of  judgment,  to  make  of  each  moment  a moment  of  high  decision 
in  the  loving-kindness  of  God. 

— Paul  Scherer,  in  Love  Is  a Spendthrift,  Harper  & Brothers,  1961,  p.  6. 


KERYGMA  AND  DISCIPLESHIP 

THE  BASIS  OF  NEW  TESTAMENT  ETHICS 
Otto  A.  Piper 


The  Uniqueness  of 
New  Testament  Ethics 

Not  until  the  eighteenth  century 
did  Protestant  theology  treat 
Christian  Ethics  as  an  independent 
subject.  It  was  taken  for  granted  that 
the  Christian  life  fell  under  the  pur- 
view of  theology,  and  had  to  be  dis- 
cussed under  the  headings  of  Law  and 
Holy  Spirit.  While,  for  practical  pur- 
poses, philosophical  ethics  nurtured  by 
Aristotle’s  writings  was  taught  in  the 
curriculum  of  the  Arts  faculties  of  the 
universities,  the  fact  was  clearly  recog- 
nized that  it  had  its  foundation  in  Nat- 
ural Law,  and  thus  had  no  direct  rela- 
tionship with  the  life  of  faith.  But  the 
Enlightenment  of  the  eighteenth  cen- 
tury, which  regarded  Jesus  onesidedly 
as  the  great  teacher  of  mankind,  identi- 
fied his  teaching  with  morals.  The  the- 
ology of  the  nineteenth  century,  particu- 
larly under  the  influence  of  Schleier- 
macher,  was  anxious  to  regain  some 
of  the  lost  ground.  But  the  theologians 
were  overawed  by  the  authority  of  Kant, 
and  thus,  though  recognizing  that  the 
New  Testament  had  its  own  set  of  ethi- 
cal standards,  Protestant  theology  tried 
in  various  ways  to  show  that  they  had 
a rational  root  in  human  nature.  This 
meant  that  Christian  Ethics  had  to  de- 
velop its  own  method  independent  of 
dogmatics.  Christian  conduct  was  no 
longer  understood  as  being  rooted  in 
man’s  faith  but  rather  faith  had  to  be 
justified  in  ethical  terms. 


Recent  Biblical  scholarship  begins  to 
realize,  however,  that  such  an  approach 
is  not  fit  to  do  justice  to  the  New  Tes- 
tament. By  treating  ethics  as  an  auton- 
omous science  the  scholar  lost  sight  of 
the  true  meaning  of  conduct  as  it  was 
described  in  the  Gospels  and  Epistles 
of  the  New  Testament.  For  in  the  eyes 
of  the  Primitive  Church,  Jesus  was  not 
only  a teacher  or  an  example  of  good 
life  but  also  a leader  who  bade  people 
to  follow  him,  and  by  the  way  he  lived 
his  life,  he  determined  the  circumstances 
in  which  his  disciples  were  to  follow 
him.  But  where  do  we  find  the  com- 
mon denominator  of  the  ethical  teach- 
ing and  the  actual  conduct  of  Jesus? 
We  can  hardly  start  from  a supreme 
idea  such  as  love,  justice,  purity  or  faith. 
For  it  should  be  obvious  that  the  mean- 
ing of  the  ethical  commandments  dif- 
fers according  to  the  kind  of  community 
within  which  they  are  to  be  realized, 
and  according  to  the  abilities  and  re- 
sources which  people  are  supposed  to 
possess  for  the  realization  of  the  true 
life.  The  principal  question  which  we 
have  to  ask,  is  therefore  that  of  the 
actual  setting  in  which  the  believer  has 
to  live  and  to  realize  the  supreme  good. 

The  New  Testament  has  a very  sim- 
ple answer:  true  life  is  life  with  Jesus. 
This  holds  good  not  only  for  his  earthly 
life  and  his  intercourse  with  his  dis- 
ciples, but  also  for  his  participation  in 
the  life  of  the  Church  in  his  risen  state, 
as  can  be  learned  from  an  unbiased 
study  of  the  Acts  of  the  Apostles,  the 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


15 


Epistles,  and  the  Revelation  of  John. 

In  Acts,  for  example,  Luke  is  anx- 
ious to  show  that  not  a single  one  of 
the  decisive  and  epoch-making  events 
in  the  life  of  the  Primitive  Church  hap- 
pened in  a purely  incidental  way.  They 
came  to  pass  as  a result  of  the  determi- 
nation of  the  people  concerned  never 
to  follow  their  own  imaginations,  but 
rather  to  be  guided  by  their  risen  Lord 
and  his  Spirit.  In  a similar  manner,  the 
Revelation  of  John  describes  the  life 
of  the  Church  under  persecution  as  be- 
ing fashioned  by  obedience  to  the  risen 
Lord  or  lack  thereof.  Among  the  au- 
thors of  the  New  Testament  letters, 
Paul  brings  out  most  decisively  the  fact 
that  his  whole  activity  as  an  Apostle 
was  conditioned  by  his  faith,  that  is  to 
say  by  the  personal  relationship  in 
which  he  stood  with  his  Master.  For 
practical  purposes,  however,  it  will  be 
advisable  to  start  the  study  of  New  Tes- 
tament ethics  from  the  Gospels,  because 
in  them  the  disciples’  intercourse  with 
Jesus  is  described  most  graphically. 

Although  Jesus  is  called  the  friend 
of  his  disciples,  their  mutual  relation- 
ship was  not  a purely  sentimental  one. 
The  kind  of  fellowship  that  Jesus  of- 
fered to  those  who  were  willing  to  fol- 
low him,  was  that  of  a teacher  with  his 
pupils.  To  his  contemporaries,  and  in 
particular  to  his  disciples,  Jesus  ap- 
peared as  a teacher,  who  in  his  methods 
had  much  in  common  with  the  Jewish 
scribes  (e.g.,  Mk.  4:38;  9:38;  10:35; 
13  :i ; Lk.  21  :y),  and  Jesus  himself  used 
the  title  “teacher”  as  self-designation 
(e.g.,  Mt.  10:24;  Lk.  6:40;  Mt.  23:8; 
26:18;  Mk.  14:14).  But  equally  re- 
markable is  the  fact  that  outside  of  the 
Synoptic  Gospels  Jesus  is  nowhere  in 
the  New  Testament  referred  to  as 


teacher.  The  appellation  is  reserved  to 
the  teachers  of  the  Church.  The  reason 
is  obvious.  The  disciples  were  aware 
of  the  uniqueness  of  Jesus’  teaching. 
Unlike  that  of  the  rabbis,  it  carried 
spiritual  authority  with  it  (e.g.,  Mk. 
1:22;  Mt.  7:29;  Mk.  1:27;  11:18), 
that  is  to  say,  it  had  a compelling  and 
convincing  effect.  Furthermore,  people 
realized  the  “newness”  of  his  teaching 
(Mk.  1 :27).  In  its  surprising  original- 
ity it  struck  them  as  indicating  the  dawn 
of  the  final  age.  They  sensed  that  his 
message  was  rooted  in  the  very  ground 
of  reality  and  thus  it  made  manifest 
the  true  meaning  of  life. 

The  disciples  were  consistently  made 
aware  of  the  unique  character  of  the  re- 
lationship in  which  they  stood  with  Je- 
sus. By  forbidding  them  to  be  called 
“teacher”  (Mt.  23:8;  cp.  Mt.  10:24; 
Lk.  6:40)  Jesus  claims  for  himself  an 
exclusive  role  vis-a-vis  of  them,  because 
he  was  himself  the  very  source  of  his 
teaching.  All  those  who  followed  him 
would  therefore  remain  dependent  on 
the  message  he  conveyed  to  them.  The 
true  character  of  Jesus’  teaching  can 
best  be  seen  in  his  denunciation  of  the 
scribes,  that  is  to  say,  the  official  teach- 
ers of  Israel  (Mk.  12:38-40).  The 
“teacher”  Jesus  was  then  proclaiming  the 
divine  Judgment  upon  them.  It  is  this 
kind  of  teaching  that  Jesus  will  con- 
tinue beyond  his  death.  To  his  disciples, 
he  promised  that  in  times  of  persecution 
they  would  be  taught  by  the  Holy  Spirit 
(Mk.  13:11;  Mt.  10:19;  Lk.  12:12). 
As  his  own  teaching  was  conditioned  by 
the  Spirit  of  God  who  in  his  Baptism 
had  descended  upon  him  (Mk.  1:10; 
Mt.  3:16;  Lk.  3:22),  so  would  that 
Spirit,  who  had  become  one  with  him, 
continue  to  teach  them. 


i6 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


Law  and  Kerygma 

What  was  the  supreme  value  by 
which  Jesus  was  guided  both  in  his 
teaching  and  in  his  conduct  ? According 
to  the  Synoptists,  the  teaching  of  Jesus 
was  not  primarily  ethical  but  rather  it 
concerned  itself  with  the  coming  of 
God’s  Kingdom  or  kingly  rule  here  on 
earth.  To  this  eschatological  message, 
the  ethical  teaching  of  Jesus  might  be 
related  in  two  different  ways.  The  an- 
nouncement of  the  Kingdom  can  be  re- 
garded as  furnishing  the  setting  for  the 
activities  of  the  believers  (cf.  Schlat- 
ter, Amos  Wilder),  or  the  Kingdom 
may  be  interpreted  as  the  goal  and  re- 
sult of  the  Christian  efforts  (cf.  Kant, 
Ritschl,  the  Social  Gospel).  Those 
scholars  who  consider  Jesus’  eschato- 
logical teaching  as  a mere  adaptation  to 
popular  language  overlook  the  fact  that 
his  whole  teaching  is  tinged  with  escha- 
tological language.  This  leads  one  to 
the  conclusion  that  Jesus’  ethical  in- 
struction was  rooted  in  his  eschato- 
logical proclamation.  Understood  apart 
from  the  fact  that  God  is  now  establish- 
ing his  realm  here  on  earth,  the  Sermon 
on  the  Mount  would  be  excessive  ideal- 
ism or  pathological,  self-destructive  fa- 
naticism. But  when  Albert  Schweitzer 
interprets  Matt.  5-7  as  “interimistic  eth- 
ics” to  be  practiced  during  the  short  in- 
terval between  the  day  of  its  proclama- 
tion and  the  breaking  in  of  the  Day  of 
Yahve  only,  he  misunderstands  com- 
pletely the  message  of  Jesus.  For  with 
the  ministry  of  Jesus,  the  power  of 
God’s  Kingdom  is  already  at  work  in 
this  world,  and  those  in  whom  it  oper- 
ates will  be  able  to  act  as  described  in 
the  Sermon  on  the  Mount. 

Similarly,  the  authority,  which  Jesus 
claims  for  his  ethical  teaching,  is  rooted 


in  the  fact  that  he  participates  in  the 
eschatological  process  as  an  insider ; he 
is  part  of  that  process  himself.  Hence, 
even  when  he  refers  to  the  Old  Testa- 
ment it  is  not  as  a given  authority  which 
has  to  be  interpreted  in  a casuistic  way 
— so  did  the  scribes — but  rather  Jesus 
can  point  out  what  the  original  inten- 
tion of  the  divine  lawgiver  has  been, 
e.g.,  in  the  matter  of  divorce  (Mk.  10: 
2-9).  In  other  words,  it  is  as  the  Son 
of  God  that  Jesus  offers  his  ethical 
teaching.  He  is  capable  of  instructing 
people  in  such  unique  manner  because 
he  ‘sees’  God.  He  comprehends  the  di- 
vine will  from  within  God’s  operation, 
whereas  the  rabbis  are  dealing  with  an 
infallible  commandment,  whose  inter- 
pretation, however,  is  the  victim  of 
man’s  limited  knowledge  and  compre- 
hension. The  Synoptists  and  John  agree 
on  this  characterization  of  Jesus’  teach- 
ing (e.g.,  Mt.  11 125-30;  Lk.  10:21-24; 
John  6:40;  8:38).  Thus  Law  and  Ke- 
rygma are  seen  by  him  as  emanating 
from  a common  source,  namely  God’s 
redemptive  purpose.  Consequently  the 
commandments  given  by  Jesus  are  de- 
scriptions of  the  life  he  lives,  and  which 
his  followers  are  promised  to  receive. 
Hence,  the  imperative  form  of  the  state- 
ments gives  expression  to  the  absolute 
necessity  under  which  man  stands,  when 
confronted  with  God.  Thus  Jesus  in- 
dicates that  he  has  no  choice  concerning 
the  way  and  the  goal  of  his  ministry. 
The  strange  kind  of  life  he  lives  he  is 
compelled  to  live,  if  he  is  to  be  faithful 
to  his  mission  and  nature. 

His  mission  Jesus  defines  as  his  com- 
ing to  fulfil  the  Law  and  the  Prophets 
(Mt.  5:17).  As  the  context  and  the 
Old  Testament  meaning  of  the  verb 
pleroo  show,  this  characterization  does 
not  mean  that  by  making  such  a pre- 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


1 7 


tentious  statement,  Jesus  wanted  to  un- 
derline his  perfect  compliance  with  the 
Law.  Rather  “to  fulfill”  has  an  eschato- 
logical connotation.  The  purpose  for 
which  God  had  given  the  Law  and  sent 
the  Prophets  was  eventually  being  real- 
i ized  in  the  ministry  of  Jesus.  By  em- 
phasizing that  the  decisive  event  in  the 
history  of  mankind  issues  from  God, 
Jesus  enjoins  men  to  consider  their  lives 
as  given  to  them  for  God’s  sake.  Such 
perspective  is  absent  both  from  the  vari- 
ous schools  of  philosophical  ethics  as 
also  from  the  rabbinical  interpretation 
of  the  Torah,  all  of  which  are  based 
upon  a man-centered  attitude.  Quite 
apart  from  its  concomitant  exhorta- 
tions, Jesus’  message  of  the  advent  of 
the  Kingdom  subjects  the  whole  life 
of  man  to  the  service  of  God’s  purpose. 
Conversely,  the  divine  proclamation  of 
the  Mosaic  Law  was  in  the  eyes  of  Je- 
sus intended  to  remind  people  of  the 
fact  that  by  nature  they  were  inclined 
to  disregard  God’s  will.  Accordingly, 
the  obstacles  which  people  encounter  on 
the  way  to  what  in  their  egotism  they 
regard  their  supreme  good,  be  it  self- 
perfection  or  happiness,  existential  self- 
realization  or  a perfect  world  order,  are 
explained  in  the  light  of  the  divine  com- 
mandments as  being  placed  there  by 
God  in  order  to  remind  man  of  the 
falsehood  of  his  evaluations.  No  matter 
how  passionately  he  may  crave  for  free- 
dom, man  is  doomed  as  a sinner  to  live 
in  a world  of  limitations  by  which  his 
activities  are  hemmed  in  from  all  sides. 

The  Law  itself  is  interpreted  by  Je- 
sus as  such  a limitation.  Whereas  not 
only  secular  ethics  but  also  many  of  the 
theological  ethics  start  from  the  as- 
sumption that  the  moral  law  is  an  in- 
dication of  the  moral  goodness  of  man, 
and  that  only  incidentally  it  is  to  warn 


him  also  against  transgressions,  Jesus 
teaches  his  disciples  that  it  is  to  sinful 
people  that  God  has  given  his  Law,  and 
that  divine  permissions,  as,  e.g.,  that 
of  divorce,  are  reminders  of  their  sin- 
fulness (Mk.  10:5).  Even  God’s  chosen 
people,  far  from  being  good,  have  turned 
away  from  him  so  completely  that  with- 
out the  provisions  of  the  Law  it  would 
disintegrate.  Thus  shows,  that  when 
adopted  apart  from  Jesus’  ministry,  the 
Law  lacks  the  strength  to  bring  about 
goodness.  While  this  condition  does  not 
prevent  man  from  doing  things  which 
are  beneficial  to  others  (e.g.,  Mt.  7:11 ; 
Lk.  11:13),  they,  nevertheless,  do  not 
serve  the  end  for  which  man  was  made 
by  God.  For  God  created  him  that 
through  his  life  he  should  manifest  the 
glory  of  his  maker.  Yet  in  our  ‘natural’ 
goodness,  we  contrive  actions  the  bene- 
ficial effects  of  which  are  confined  to 
the  group  with  which  the  individual 
associates,  and  they  serve  practical  ends 
only. 

It  is  not  surprising,  therefore,  that 
the  kerygma  of  the  advent  of  God’s 
kingly  rule  should  be  coupled  by  Jesus 
with  the  call  to  repentance,  that  is  to 
say,  return  to  God.  The  significance  of 
this  demand  has  frequently  been  mis- 
understood, because  hereby  the  keryg- 
ma, too,  is  made  to  approach  man  under 
the  form  of  an  imperative.  Thus  the 
difference  of  the  two  Testaments  seems 
to  be  at  the  best  one  of  degree  only. 
Actually,  however,  the  divine  behest 
has  never  changed  (I  John  2 :6-8).  The 
change  which  Jesus  proclaims  is  one  of 
the  situation  only,  in  which  God’s  word 
reaches  man.  Formerly  the  divine  de- 
mand had  been  received  in  ‘darkness,’ 
namely  within  the  narrow  perspective  of 
a life,  in  which  people  tried  to  make  the 
best  of  their  own  shortcomings  and  the 


i8 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


evils  of  this  world.  While  the  knowl- 
edge of  what  is  right  and  the  ability  to 
act  accordingly  are  found  in  all  men 
(e.g.,  the  story  of  the  Good  Samaritan, 
Lk.  10:29-37)  ^ is  the  “hardness”  of 
man’s  heart  which  renders  him  disin- 
clined most  of  the  time  actually  to  do 
God’s  will. 

Following  Jesus 

That  even  in  the  age  of  faith  the  dis- 
closure of  the  purpose  of  God  should 
be  addressed  to  man  in  the  form  of  a 
commandment  is  an  indication  of  man’s 
inability  instinctively  or  of  himself  to 
make  the  transition  from  darkness  to 
light.  No  wonder,  therefore,  that  a great 
deal  of  Jesus’  teaching  should  assume 
the  grammatical  form  of  an  imperative. 
But  as  the  evangelists  emphasized  the 
complete  newness  of  that  teaching,  they 
illustrated  its  paradoxical  demands  by 
recording  numerous  instances  of  Jesus’ 
dealing  with  other  people.  Quite  apart 
from  the  personal  charm  deployed  in 
many  of  them,  they  exhibit  the  new 
vision  of  life  that  Jesus  had  and  that  he 
conveyed  not  so  much  by  means  of  the- 
oretical discussions  but  rather  by  his 
conduct. 

Having  in  himself  that  new  life,  that 
is  to  say,  life  as  God  intended  it  to  be, 
was  the  cause  of  the  irresistible  power 
by  which  people  were  attracted  to  Jesus. 
Yet  the  Gospels  show  also  that  the  dis- 
ciples were  not  immediately  aware  of 
what  this  inseparable  combination  of 
teaching  and  personality  meant.  Not  un- 
til Pentecost  did  they  realize  for  the 
first  time  the  full  splendor  of  the  new 
vision  which  the  Saviour  had  imparted 
to  them.  In  their  eyes,  he  was  not  the 
sinless  one  only,  i.e.  a man  who  had 
never  transgressed  the  Law,  but  rather 
the  Righteous  One  (e.g.,  Acts  3:14;  I 


John  2:1,  cp.  Mt.  5:20),  that  is  to  say 
a man  who  beyond  the  letter  of  the  Law 
had  complied  with  God’s  demand,  and 
who  therefore  was  the  faithful  witness 
(Rev.  1:5;  3:14),  i.e.  the  one  who 
evidenced  man’s  ability  to  realize  the 
purpose  for  which  God  had  created 
him.  The  modern  Protestant  antipathy 
against  the  Law,  supported  allegedly  by 
the  primacy  of  the  Gospel,  or  of  Love, 
completely  misunderstands  Jesus.  There 
is  no  contrast  between  Law  and  Gos- 
pel, rather  the  good  news  of  the  coming 
of  God’s  Kingdom  has  become  reality 
in  Jesus’  re-establishing  the  cosmic  or- 
der, in  which  everybody  and  everything 
receives  the  place  for  which  it  is  des- 
tined. 

By  the  sovereignty,  with  which  Jesus 
brushes  away  all  the  obstacles  that  sepa- 
rate people  from  each  other  and  from 
God,  and  prevent  them  from  reaching 
their  destination,  Jesus  proves  his  lord- 
ship.  The  disciples  realized  soon  after 
he  had  called  them  that  their  relation- 
ship to  him  was  not  built  upon  the 
basis  of  personal  allegiance  or  pedagogic 
eros.  Jesus’  call  required  from  the  out- 
set belief  in  his  sovereignty  and  his  di- 
vine mission.  In  turn,  it  was  this  belief 
of  the  disciples,  fragmentary  and  weak 
as  it  was,  that  survived  the  death  of 
their  master  and  made  the  apostles  bold 
to  contend  that  the  risen  one  was  pres- 
ent in  the  midst  of  their  fellowship.  The 
spiritual  growth  which  the  disciples  ex- 
perienced as  they  followed  Jesus  can 
be  learned  from  the  way  in  which  they 
spoke  and  acted  as  leaders  of  the  Primi- 
tive Church,  and  from  the  profound  yet 
realistic  manner  in  which  the  new  life 
is  described  in  their  letters. 

The  vision  of  the  new  life,  as  the 
New  Testament  understands  it,  com- 
prises not  only  the  destination  which 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


19 


God  has  assigned  to  man,  but  also  the 
central  significance  which  Jesus  has  in 
the  actualization  of  that  life.  Hence, 
when  he  called  people  to  follow  him, 
our  Lord  was  not  just  a teacher  anxious 
to  have  students.  He  wanted  his  Dis- 
ciples “to  be  with  him”  (Mk.  3:14), 
that  is  to  say  to  share  his  life  and  mes- 
sianic ministry.  This  did  not  mean,  as 
later  generations  so  frequently  under- 
stood it,  that  the  Disciples  were  to  imi- 
tate Jesus’  life.  The  New  Testament 
records  leave  no  doubt  concerning  the 
difference  between  the  Master  and  his 
disciples  (e.g.,  Mk.  6:13;  9:18  par.). 
What  they  had  in  common  with  him 
was  first  of  all  the  common  pursuit  of 
that  new  vision  of  a God-given  life,  and, 
as  a result,  their  willingness  to  accept 
the  way,  on  which  Jesus  led  them,  as 
an  expression  of  his  genuine  under- 
standing of  God’s  redemptive  will. 
Hence  the  apostles  were  ready  to  pre- 
pare God’s  chosen  people  for  the  even- 
tual manifestation  of  the  Messiah’s  glo- 
ry, no  less  than  to  endure  with  the  Mas- 
ter all  the  hardships  and  hostile  acts 
that  were  implied  in  such  an  endeavor. 

Modern  Protestant  theology  seems  to 
be  eager  to  correct  the  work  of  Jesus  by 
contending  that  social  and  international 
activities  are  absolutely  necessary  as 
primary  evidences  of  a Christian  life. 
But  while  Jesus  did  not  disparage  good 
works,  he  pointed  out,  nevertheless, 
that  there  was  an  order  of  spiritual 
growth,  and  unless  first  things  were 
given  priority  no  spiritual  fruits  could 
be  expected.  Basic  requirements  of  a 
true  life  are  humility,  purity  of  heart, 
trust  in  God’s  power  and  faithfulness 
even  in  the  most  insignificant  matters. 
Man’s  principal  goal  is  the  building  up 
of  God’s  people  here  on  earth.  Most 
urgent  therefore  is  the  willingness  to 


serve  others  rather  than  to  pursue  one’s 
own  interests,  and  the  restoration  of 
brotherly  relationships,  wherever  they 
have  been  spurned  or  disregarded  or 
disturbed.  This  obligation  takes  prece- 
dence even  of  the  prescribed  acts  of 
worship  (Mt.  5:23-24).  Since  the  fel- 
lowman  lives  in  this  world,  those  who 
follow  Jesus  cannot  withdraw  from  it 
into  a dream  world  or  a self-chosen 
solitude.  Yet  their  attitude  will  be  one 
of  compassionate  love  anxious  to  trans- 
form this  world  rather  than  an  accept- 
ance hereof  as  it  is.  By  living  with  Je- 
sus, the  disciples  learnt  no  longer  to 
be  afraid  of  the  seemingly  uncontrolla- 
ble forces  of  the  universe  and  their  en- 
mity, for  they  saw  how  by  the  power 
of  faith  their  Master  triumphed  over 
them.  A further  important  lesson  the 
disciples  appropriated  was  the  experi- 
ence of  guidance  and  strength  that 
comes  to  people  who  consort  in  a fel- 
lowship whose  common  goal  transcends 
the  interests  of  each  and  all  of  them. 
By  their  willingness  to  dedicate  their 
lives  to  God’s  cause,  that  is  to  say  to 
foster  the  advancement  of  his  Kingdom, 
they  felt  the  Holy  Spirit  working  in 
their  hearts  as  a power  which  not  only 
enlightened  them  but  also  moved  them 
to  overcome  their  own  reluctance  and 
fear. 

The  records  of  the  New  Testament 
indicate  clearly  that  this  life  of  dis- 
cipleship  was  an  unconspicuous  life. 
There  were  not  many  outstanding  deeds 
in  the  Primitive  Church,  otherwise  ref- 
erence would  be  made  of  them.  Rather 
the  early  Christians  shared  their  daily 
life,  its  needs  and  its  chores.  Yet  it  was 
not,  what  through  a misunderstanding 
of  Bonhoefifer,  is  considered  a flight  in- 
to secularly.  While  not  everyone  per- 
formed the  work  of  an  Apostle  or  an 


20 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


evangelist,  all  felt  responsible  for  the 
propagation  of  the  Gospel,  and  they 
considered  common  worship  and  com- 
mon religious  instruction  essential  fea- 
tures of  their  fellowship  (Acts  2 142, 46). 

The  Lord  of  the  Church 

What  is  described  in  the  New  Testa- 
ment as  the  life  of  the  disciples,  is  to 
serve  as  an  example  for  all  the  Chris- 
tians. But  what  does  discipleship  mean 
for  us  who  are  no  longer  privileged  to 
walk  with  Jesus?  Well,  above  all,  we 
should  remember  that  as  in  the  days  of 
Jesus,  the  Kingdom  is  something  to  be 
sought.  For  what  matters,  is  Christ’s 
work  rather  than  his  mere  presence 
among  us.  The  progress  of  God’s  re- 
demptive work,  although  it  has  never 
ceased,  is  nevertheless  not  something 
that  is  immediately  obvious.  What  in 
our  seeking  we  discover  is,  negatively, 
the  fact  that  despite  the  American  en- 
thusiasm for  international  action,  civil 
rights  and  social  justice,  there  is  no 
hope  of  doing  God’s  will  in  those  areas, 
unless  we  apply  the  Christian  attitude 
of  faith  to  them,  that  is  to  say,  trust  in 
God,  willingness  to  serve,  humility  and 
purity  of  heart.  Apart  from  faith,  the 
change  accomplished  may  alter  the 
structure  of  social  life,  but  it  leaves  the 
basic  problems  unsolved,  pace  the  con- 
dition of  the  negroes  in  the  northern 
states  of  the  USA,  notwithstanding 
their  emancipation. 

Positively,  two  facts  should  be  taken 
into  consideration.  Firstly,  the  Church 
still  enjoys  the  presence  and  the  fellow- 
ship of  the  risen  Lord,  and  thus  it  has 


not  only  powers  at  its  disposal  by  which 
the  pattern  of  this  world  can  be  radi- 
cally transformed,  but  its  history  itself 
is  the  result  of  the  constant  guidance 
given  to  it  by  Jesus.  Events  such  as, 
for  example,  the  ecumenical  movement, 
the  feeling  of  spiritual  dissatisfaction  in 
today’s  churches,  or  the  groping  for  a 
theology  of  facts  instead  of  a theology 
of  words,  must  be  understood  as  symp- 
toms of  the  work  that  the  risen  Lord 
carries  on  in  its  midst,  and  hence  they 
demand  appropriate  action.  Secondly, 
the  vision  of  the  new  life  which  Jesus 
implanted  into  the  Twelve,  is  still  with 
us.  It  is  not  a rigid  set  of  command- 
ments or  a system  of  established  vir- 
tues, but  rather  it  constantly  remodels 
itself  in  the  course  of  Church  history,  as 
the  Spirit  moves  Christians  to  apply 
their  faith  to  changing  historical  situa- 
tions. Thus  the  Church  occupies  a two- 
fold position  in  the  believer’s  life.  It  is 
the  Body  of  the  risen  Lord,  through 
which  the  individual  is  conditioned  and 
guided,  and  it  is  at  the  same  time  a so- 
cial institution  in  this  world,  to  whose 
quickening  the  believer’s  effort  is  de- 
voted. This  explains  the  paradox  of  the 
Christian  life.  The  believer  is  not  anx- 
ious to  bring  about  a new  and  better 
world,  but  either  he  wants  to  do  what 
Jesus  through  the  Spirit  urges  him  to 
perform.  Yet  when  doing  so,  he  is  used 
by  his  Lord  as  his  agent  through  whose 
activity  a new  world  comes  into  being 
which  is  not  different  only  but  also  bet- 
ter than  all  the  improvements  which 
purely  human  activity  is  able  to  bring 
about. 


THE  LIGHT  OF  MEN 

H.  Ganse  Little 


In  him  was  life  and  the  life  was  the  light  of  men.  And  the  light  shines  in  the 
darkness  and  the  darkness  has  not  overcome  it.  — John  I ‘.4,  5 


In  the  beginning  was  the  Word,  and 
the  Word  was  with  God,  and  the 
Word  was  God.  He  was  in  the  begin- 
ning with  God ; all  things  were  made 
through  him,  and  without  him  was  not 
anything  made  that  was  made.  In  him 
was  life.  And  the  life  was  the  light  of 
men.  The  light  shines  in  the  darkness, 
and  the  darkness  has  not  overcome  it.” 
That  is  to  say,  God  comes  first ! The 
Bible  never  presents  God  as  static, 
fixed,  aloof,  far  away,  immured  in  an 
unknowable  and  unconcerned  isolation 
booth.  The  Bible  always  talks  about 
God  as  having  given  abundant  proof 
to  man  that  he  is  at  the  integral  core 
of  his  Being  what  John  calls  “the 
Word” — i.e.,  that  which  to  God  is  what 
a man’s  word  and  thought  are  to  that 
man  or  that  which  in  a man  impels 
him  to  initiate  action. 

Indeed,  the  word  and  thought  which 
make  a man  “a  man  under  God,”  en- 
abling him  to  think,  to  communicate,  and 
to  act,  constitute  in  themselves  man’s 
response  to  God’s  initiating  word  and 
thought  and  act.  Such  is  the  Biblical 
meaning  of  man  “made  in  the  image  of 
God” — capable  of  creative  response  to 
God’s  creative  Word. 

In  the  metaphor  of  our  text,  there  is 
light  in  man — the  light  of  reason,  the 
light  of  faith,  the  light  of  creative 
thought  and  action,  the  light  of  love 
because  there  is  first,  last,  and  all  the 
time,  God  taking  the  initiative,  God  on 
the  move,  God  creating  and  then  visit- 


ing man  through  his  challenging,  de- 
manding, insistent  Word. 

In  this  sense,  “God  comes  first.”  God 
is  not  just  “first,”  that  is  only  part  of 
the  truth  for  the  Bible  and  for  Chris- 
tian faith.  God  comes  first,  God  always 
makes  the  first  move.  God  always  “beats 
man  to  it,”  so  to  speak. 

My  mind  goes  back  to  a group  of 
boys  madly  undressing  beside  a creek 
in  the  Ozarks,  the  urge  to  jump  into  the 
“old  swimming  hole”  accelerated  by  the 
challenging  cry.  “Last  one  in’s  a pole 
cat!”  God  is  more  circumspect  and  less 
given  to  the  vernacular  in  his  chal- 
lenge, but  he  challenges  man  neverthe- 
less ! And  man  in  immersing  himself  in 
any  aspect  of  life,  or  truth,  or  freedom, 
or  love  is  always  responding.  God,  the 
Spirit  of  God,  God  through  his  Word, 
has  already  and  always  created  and  of- 
fered the  life,  the  truth,  the  freedom 
and  the  love  which  man  finally  enters 
into,  “discovers,”  shares. 

Another  way  of  stating  this  is  to  say, 
God  through  his  eternal,  initiating 
Word  is  the  first  and  continually-at- 
work  Creator,  Inventor,  Teacher,  and 
Saviour  of  mankind. 

It  is  because  of  the  impact,  influx, 
infiltration  of  his  life  through  his  Word 
that  man  possesses  “Light” — the  light 
of  reason,  of  truth,  of  freedom,  of  love. 

The  Psalmist  heralds  the  same  con- 
viction as  the  gospel  writer : “With  Thee 
is  the  fountain  of  life ; in  thy  light  shall 
we  see  light!”  “In  him  was  life  and  the 


22 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


life  was  the  light  of  men.  And  the  light 
shines  in  the  darkness  and  the  darkness 
has  not  overcome  it.” 

It  is  important  to  bear  in  mind  just 
here  that  there  are  two  kinds  of  “dark- 
ness” in  this  world — figuratively  speak- 
ing— and  John  so  speaks:  There  is  the 
darkness  God  creates — and  there  is  the 
darkness  man  creates. 

There  is  the  darkness  into  which  God 
“calls”  or  introduces  man,  the  darkness 
in  which  God  then  bids  the  light  to 
shine,  the  darkness  in  which  God  bids 
man  look  upon  the  light.  And  there  is 
the  darkness  man  embraces  by  shutting 
out  the  light,  by  shutting  his  eyes  to  the 
light,  by  turning  his  back  upon  the  light. 

The  Bible  and  our  own  experience 
and  faith  do  not  equate  all  darkness  with 
sin  and  evil.  Only  that  darkness  in 
which  man  still  wants  to  hide  himself 
after  he  has  seen  the  light  is  evil  and 
is  sin. 

There  is  a startling  implication  in 
this  regard  in  the  opening  verses  of 
Genesis  which  describe — again  in  figur- 
ative language — God’s  initial  act  in 
Creation : “In  the  beginning  of  God’s 
creation  of  the  heavens  and  the  earth, 
the  earth  was  without  form  and  void, 
and  darkness  covered  the  deep,  and  the 
Spirit  of  God  brooded  upon  the  face  of 
the  waters.  And  God  said,  ‘Let  there 
be  Light.’  And  there  was  light.  And 
God  saw  that  the  light  was  good.  And 
God  separated  the  light  from  the  dark- 
ness, and  God  called  the  light,  day,  and 
the  darkness,  night.” 

That  is  to  say,  God  created  both  light 
and  darkness — and  he  created  darkness 
first.  Then  he  created  the  light,  estab- 
lishing a clear  distinction  and  alterna- 
tion between  the  two.  First  darkness — 
and  then  light — “And  there  was  eve- 
ning and  there  was  morning,  one  day” ! 


Moreover,  God  declared  the  light  to 
be  “good.”  But  he  did  not  state  the 
darkness  to  be  evil.  The  darkness  is  too 
primitive,  too  static,  either  to  create 
or  sustain  life  in  any  of  its  higher  forms ! 

Light  must  shine  in  the  darkness  if 
the  passive,  primordial,  pulsating  in- 
nocence and  ignorance  which  is  life  in 
the  dark  is  ever  to  be  stimulated,  chal- 
lenged, to  grow,  to  learn,  to  change,  to 
reach  out  and  up,  to  explore,  to  achieve 
at  last  that  God-destined  level  of  life 
where  Word  and  Thought  and  Action 
combine  in  love  to  create  the  life  more 
abundant ! 

Every  man  is  born  under  God  into  a 
kind  of  darkness  into  which  God’s  light 
shines.  This  soft,  lovely,  primitive,  in- 
adequate yet  inviting  darkness  is  the 
innocency  of  the  tiny  baby.  This  in- 
nocency  (which  means  utter  lack  of 
knowledge)  tugs  at  our  heartstrings. 
We  ourselves  as  adults  long  often  to 
return  to  its  comfortable  darkness  and 
unawareness.  Oh,  not  to  have  to  grow 
any  more,  to  learn,  to  change,  to  act 
responsibly  upon  the  basis  of  that  which 
we  have  learned,  and  grown  into,  and 
become ! This  is  the  desire  to  “regress,” 
to  become  a little  child  again,  to  slip 
back  into  the  soft,  safe,  cozy  passivity 
of  darkness. 

Man  is  created  in  this  state  of  “in- 
nocence” in  this  pristine,  primitive,  dark 
ignorance  of  life  and  love  and  freedom 
and  truth.  As  of  the  hour  of  his  birth, 
man  knows  nothing  about  life,  until 
“light  goes  up  in  his  darkness,”  until 
he  is  approached  in  love  with  an  offer 
of  life  and  truth  and  freedom  to  which 
he  responds.  This  response  is  growth 
into  responsible  maturity  as  a man. 

Once  the  light  is  seen  for  what  it  is 
— a stimulus,  a pressure,  an  induce- 
ment, indeed,  often  a painful  goad — to 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


23 


\ change  and  growth,  a challenge  calling 
the  child  into  manhood,  calling  for  re- 
sponse and  obedience;  once  the  light  is 
i seen  and  man  fails  to  respond,  to  obey, 
shuts  his  eyes,  turns  his  head,  turns  his 
back  to  the  light,  embraces  his  darkness 
i as  the  security  he  knows  and  loves  the 
best,  then  that  resultant  darkness  is  dif- 
ferent from  what  it  was  before ; it  is  evil 
and  Sin  for  him. 

Jesus  said,  “Men  love  darkness  (not 
because  the  darkness  is  evil)  rather 
than  light,  because  their  deeds  are  evil,” 
most  particularly  the  deed  of  rejecting 
light  and  embracing  darkness  and  so 
turning  away  from  growth  into  the  life 
more  abundant. 

Now  John  asserts  in  his  gospel  that 
all  this  energizing  Word  of  God — this 
life-inducing  light — blazed  forth  in  our 
flesh,  in  our  world,  in  our  human  his- 
tory in  the  person  of  the  man  Christ 
Jesus.  And  he  goes  on  in  his  Prologue, 
“And  the  Word  was  made  flesh  and 
dwelt  among  us.  And  we  beheld  his 
glory  like  as  of  the  only  son  of  the 
Father,  full  of  grace  and  truth.” 

This  is  the  meaning  of  the  word  in 
Isaiah : “The  people  that  walked  in 
darkness  have  seen  a great  light ; and 
they  who  sat  in  the  land  of  deep  dark- 
ness, upon  them  hath  the  light  shined.” 
This  is  the  meaning  of  Zachariah’s 
hymn  of  praise  upon  the  birth  of  his  son 
John,  who  was  to  be  known  as  the  Bap- 
tist, the  forerunner  of  the  Christ : “.  . . 
whereby  the  dayspring  from  on  high 
hath  visited  us ; to  give  light  unto  them 
that  sit  in  darkness,  and  in  the  shadow 
of  death,  to  guide  our  feet  into  the  way 
of  peace.” 

These  are  passages  we  usually  asso- 
ciate only  with  Christmas.  We  properly 
do  so  at  that  festal  time.  But  this  is  the 
story  of  Jesus  Christ,  the  light  of  men, 


the  light  of  the  world.  This  is  the  tale 
of  the  Mass  of  Christ,  of  Christ’s  Mass. 
“Mass”  derives  from  the  Latin  verb 
“sent.”  The  gospel  is  the  good  news 
of  Christ’s  “sent-ness,”  of  “the  Word 
made  flesh,”  of  God  coming  first  into 
man’s  darkness,  of  the  continual  avail- 
ability of  the  power  of  God  unto  salva- 
tion. “The  true  light  which  lighteneth 
every  man  was  coming  into  the  world.” 

Only  in  the  light  of  the  life  of  Christ 
do  we  see  light,  i.e.,  do  men  come  to 
know  themselves,  to  understand  life,  to 
grow  in  the  responsible  utilization  of 
life  and  truth  and  freedom  in  love. 

Take  three  deliberately  chosen  and 
quite  disparate  areas  of  man’s  life  and 
see  how  helpless  and  despairing  and 
fearful  is  man’s  situation  in  his  vain 
attempt  to  understand  and  use  good 
things  for  good  ends  in  his  life — apart 
from  God  in  Christ — only  to  discover 
that  good  things  become  in  his  fum- 
bling darkness  instruments  of  death  and 
hell. 

I 

Take  the  use  of  alcohol,  first.  Only 
the  man  who  sees  life  in  the  light  of  the 
life  and  love  of  Jesus  Christ  can  con- 
ceivably know  how  to  handle  what  many 
sincere  Christians  believe  to  be  a poten- 
tially good  thing  in  life — alcohol  used 
in  moderation. 

If  Christ  has  saved  a man  from  bore- 
dom, from  despair,  from  frustration, 
from  hatred  of  himself  and  life,  from 
resentment  of  others,  from  hostility  to- 
wards his  family,  from  the  childishness 
of  always  having  to  prove  his  freedom 
by  showing  he  doesn’t  know  how  to 
handle  it ; if  Christ  has  saved  man  from 
these  things,  then  he  is  set  free  to  enjoy 
another  thing  in  life  in  moderation  upon 
occasion — and  he  is  set  free  not  so  to 


24 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


drink  even  in  moderation  upon  other  oc- 
casions where  the  welfare  and  safety  of 
others  are  involved — both  decisions  be- 
ing freely  his  to  make  in  his  continual 
awareness  of  the  meaning  of  life  in 
Christ. 

If  a man  drinks  to  escape  life,  to  avoid 
the  challenge  of  responsible  maturity, 
to  drown  the  inevitable  sorrows  which 
accompany  change  and  growth,  to  hide 
himself  from  himself,  to  regress  from 
adult  living  in  a give  and  take  world 
back  into  the  darkness  of  the  irrespon- 
sible unconsciousness  of  childhood,  he 
is  literally  “lost.”  He  isn’t  lost  because 
he  drinks,  he  drinks  because  he’s  lost. 

The  issue  is  not  “to  drink  or  not  to 
drink,”  the  issue  is,  a man’s  freedom  to 
drink  and  not  to  drink  each  in  accord 
with  a penetrating  understanding  of  his 
own  life  and  the  lives  of  others  as  seen 
in  the  light  of  the  life  of  Christ. 

II 

Take  next  the  awesome  power  for 
good  which  is  atomic  energy.  Only  as 
man  sees  the  life  of  mankind  under 
God  in  Christ  dare  man  make  use  of  the 
tremendous  energy  he  has  unlocked 
from  God’s  storehouse  with  the  help 
of  God’s  freely  given  light  of  reason  for 
the  life  of  mankind  rather  than  for  the 
death  of  mankind. 

The  issue  again  is  not : is  man  usurp- 
ing the  power  of  God  like  Prometheus 
of  ancient  Greek  myth ; the  issue  is : 
has  man’s  life  been  sufficiently  condi- 
tioned by  the  light  of  the  glory  of  God 
in  the  face  of  Jesus  Christ  so  that  man 
is  free  to  use  his  awesome  possession  in 
terms  of  the  values  taught  and  exempli- 
fied in  Christ?  The  stark  realism  of  the 
Old  Testament  fits  our  dilemma  today: 
“Behold,  saith  the  Lord,  I have  set 
before  you  life  and  death.  Choose 


life !”  The  New  Testament  would  say, 
“Choose  Christ — who  is  the  way,  the 
truth,  and  the  life !”  Man  is  so  tempted 
to  choose  himself — and  death. 

In  our  beloved  land  our  thought  gives 
evidence  of  substantial  regression  from 
that  day  at  the  outset  of  World  War  II 
when  we  were  filled  with  horror  at  the 
saturation  bombing  of  Rotterdam.  Nor 
does  the  testimony  of  many  experts  in 
the  field  that  we  might  have  secured  the 
same  end  result  near  the  close  of  that 
same  conflict  by  dropping  a demonstra- 
tion atomic  bomb  harmlessly  in  the 
Pacific  rather  than  decimating  Hiro- 
shima and  Nagasaki  lull  our  consciences 
to  sleep. 

Once  more,  the  issue  is  not : “I 
would  rather  be  dead  than  Red.”  It  is 
not  even,  “I  would  rather  be  dead  than 
alive  under  any  given  set  of  circum- 
stances.” The  first  is  a falsely  stated  set 
of  alternatives.  The  second  is  not  a live 
option  for  a committed  Christian.  The 
issue  is : “In  the  light  of  the  life  and 
death  and  resurrection  of  Jesus  Christ, 
do  we  commit  ourselves  to  the  thesis : 
We  are  willing  to  destroy  the  world 
of  men,  if  in  our  judgment  that  is  neces- 
sary, for  the  sake  of  the  life  more 
abundant !”  ? 

Ill 

Finally,  and  surprisingly  perhaps, 
take  “religion.”  Apart  from  the  light 
of  the  whole  life  and  love  of  God  as  re- 
vealed in  Jesus  Christ,  religion  is  the 
most  destructive,  vicious,  evil  power 
man  can  bend  to  his  own  selfish  de- 
vices. 

How  Jesus  Christ  castigated  “reli- 
gion” and  religious  people!  Religion  is 
man  cutting  God  down  to  his  size — to 
the  kind,  color,  and  creed  of  his  nation, 
his  race,  his  economic  philosophy,  his 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


25 


cultural  heritage,  and  the  pattern  of  his 
morality.  Religion  is  God  made  in  man’s 
image.  Religion  is  man  shutting  his  eyes 
to  God  as  seen  in  Jesus  Christ,  turning 
his  back  to  the  light  of  Christ,  and 
peering  into  a mirror  darkly,  sees  his 
own  shadowy  image  with  the  help  of  the 
very  light  he  denies,  and  cries  out, 
“Thou  art  my  God.” 

The  greatest  enemy  of  the  light  of 
God  in  Christ  is  “religion” — including 
much  that  passes  for  Christianity ! 
Apart  from  Jesus  Christ,  religion  in- 
cluding Christianity  inevitably  becomes 
degraded  by  superstition,  bigotry,  prej- 
udice, provincialism,  hostility,  igno- 
rance, selfishness  and  sin.  “In  him  was 
life  and  the  life  was  the  light  of  men. 
And  the  light  shines  in  the  darkness 
and  the  darkness  has  not  overcome  it.” 
Over  and  over  again,  man  turns  his 
back  upon  God  as  seen  in  Jesus  Christ 
and  in  the  darkness  of  that  perverse 
turning  away,  seeks  to  fashion  out  of  his 
own  moralism,  scientism,  religion,  a 
scheme  of  salvation  more  congenial  to 
his  fear  and  pride.  And  man  seems  to 
get  away  with  it,  doesn’t  he?  “How 
futile,”  we  cry,  “is  the  name  and  claim 
of  Christ  in  the  lives  of  men.  How 
pitifully  ineffective  is  the  light  of  his 
life  in  this  dark  world  where  men  love 
the  darkness  rather  than  the  light !” 

But  God  declares  this  judgment  to  be 
too  hasty,  to  be  itself  a product  of  man’s 
turning  away  from  Christ,  the  too  fear- 
ful, too  wishful  thinking  of  a closed 
mind  rationalizing  behind  closed  eyes. 

God  in  Christ  still  comes  first,  last 
and  all  the  time ! The  cry  of  the 
Psalmist  reflects  this  painful  pressure: 
“Whither  shall  I go  from  thy  Spirit, 
and  whither  shall  I flee  from  thy  pres- 
ence? If  I ascend  up  into  heaven,  Thou 
art  there : if  I make  my  bed  in  hell,  be- 


hold, Thou  art  there.  If  I take  the  wings 
of  the  morning  and  dwell  in  the  utter- 
most parts  of  the  sea ; even  there  shall 
thy  hand  lead  me,  and  thy  right  hand 
shall  hold  me.  If  I say,  surely  the  dark- 
ness shall  cover  me : even  the  night 
shall  be  light  without  me.  Yea,  the  dark- 
ness hideth  me  not  from  Thee !” 

The  Word  of  God  is  more  powerful 
than  any  two-edged  sword  (than  mega- 
ton hydrogen  bomb) — more  powerful 
even  than  the  most  intransigent  and 
savage  enemy  of  all — the  heart  of  man. 
Thus  the  voice  of  Isaiah  speaks  for 
God,  “My  Word  shall  not  return  unto 
me  void,  but  shall  accomplish  the  pur- 
pose whereto  I sent  it.” 

The  sign,  symbol,  and  seal  of  this 
promise  is  the  fact  of  the  resurrection ! 
On  this  first  day  after  another  celebra- 
tion of  Easter — and  in  this  post-Easter 
world — we  glory  in  the  vacated  sepul- 
chre. At  its  open  door,  “See  the  Christ 
stand !”  Once  and  for  all  time,  the  hand 
of  God  has  violated  the  hiding  place  of 
death.  Light  streams  forth  out  of  the 
darkness  of  the  tomb  of  man’s  faithless- 
ness and  fear.  In  the  resurrection  of 
Jesus  Christ,  God  rejects  man’s  rejec- 
tion of  the  light.  God  thunders  an  Ever- 
lasting “Yea  and  Amen”  to  man’s  pro- 
testing “Nay  and  Never.”  The  seven 
words  of  the  cross  are  followed  by  the 
last  word  of  all — the  first  Word  from 
the  grave!  “Lo,  I am  with  you  always 
even  unto  the  end  of  this  present  age.” 
In  such  a day  surely  the  word  of  an 
honored  school  of  the  prophets  to  the 
world  of  men  remains  one  and  the 
same:  “For  it  is  the  God  who  said,  ‘Let 
light  shine  out  of  darkness,’  who  has 
shone  in  our  hearts  to  give  the  light  of 
the  glory  of  God  in  the  face  of  Christ. 

. . . We  have  this  treasure  in  earthen 


26 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


vessels,  to  show  that  the  transcendent 
power  belongs  to  God  and  not  to  us. 
. . . We  too  believe,  and  so  we  speak 
knowing  that  he  who  raised  the  Lord 
Jesus  will  raise  us  also  with  Jesus  and 
bring  us  with  you  into  his  presence.  For 
it  is  all  for  your  sake,  so  that  as  grace 
extends  to  more  and  more  people  it  may 
increase  thanksgiving,  to  the  glory  of 
God.” 

God  in  Christ,  the  Word  made  flesh, 


has  great  staying  power,  a limitless 
power  of  penetration : kingdoms  will 
come  and  go ; nations  wax  and  wane ; 
economies  rise  and  fall;  philosophies 
and  religions  flourish  and  decline,  but 
“Jesus  Christ  is  the  same,  yesterday,  to- 
day and  forever.” 

“In  him  was  life  and  the  life  was 
the  light  of  men.  And  the  light  shines 
in  the  darkness  and  the  darkness  has 
not  overcome  it.” 


There  is  a theological  dimension  in  institutional  as  well  as  individual  appraisal.  The  theo- 
logical dimension,  even  though  it  complicates  evaluation  and  provides  great  theoretical  diffi- 
culties for  the  scientific  investigator,  gives  a depth  and  meaning  to  Christian  education 
evaluation  that  would  otherwise  be  lacking.  In  fact,  without  thorough  attention  to  the  theo- 
logical dimension,  Christian  education  evaluation  would  be  so  meaningless  as  to  be  im- 
possible. 

What  is  this  theological  dimension?  Simply  put,  it  is  the  assertion  that  in  Christian  edu- 
cation there  is  much  more  than  meets  the  eye,  and  that  this  “more  than  meets  the  eye”  con- 
sists of  the  dynamic  work  of  God  in  man’s  midst : his  purposes,  his  mighty  acts,  and  the 
work  of  his  Holy  Spirit. 

— D.  Campbell  Wyckoff,  in  How  to  Evaluate  Your  Christian  Education  Program, 
Westminster,  1962,  p.  21. 


PROPHET  AND  PRIEST,  BUT  NOT  A KING 

Eugene  Carson  Blake 

And  he  said  to  them,  ‘The  Kings  of  the  Gentiles  exercise  Lordship  over  them; 
and  those  in  authority  over  them  are  called  Benefactors.  But  not  so  with  you; 
rather  let  the  greatest  among  you  become  as  the  youngest,  and  the  leader  as  one 
who  serves.’  — Luke  22  125,  26 


I want  to  speak  to  you  today  about 
your  ministry.  As  you  are  gradu- 
ated from  Theological  Seminary  this 
week,  you  go  out  from  this  place  to  your 
new  places  in  the  life  of  the  Church. 
How  you  conceive  of  your  ministry  of 
word  and  sacrament  will  be  important 
not  only  as  you  begin  it,  but  also  all 
through  your  years  of  service  to  God 
and  his  people. 

Much  is  said  these  days  about  the 
image  of  the  Protestant  minister.  It  is 
alleged  that  you  young  men  are  general- 
ly either  confused  about  the  ministry 
you  are  entering,  or  else  that  you  resist 
the  image  of  it  that  is  most  current.  You 
are  all  familiar  with  the  studies  of 
Richard  Niebuhr,  which  realistically 
describe  the  pastorate  in  the  American 
Church.  The  new  emphasis  of  this  study 
is  upon  the  administrative  task  that  is 
laid  upon  the  American  pastor.  Due 
to  the  multiplication  of  program  activi- 
ties even  in  the  smaller  churches,  the 
“image”  of  the  pastor  has  now  come  to 
be  that  of  an  executive  of  a social  agen- 
cy. He  is  expected  to  make  the  church 
“go”  and  his  “success”  seems  to  be 
measured  by  various  statistics  such  as 
new  members  received,  money  raised, 
buildings  built,  and  the  number  of  bus- 
tling programs  conceived  and  promoted. 

It  is  no  wonder  to  me  that  many  of 
you  are  hesitant  and  unsure  of  your 
calling,  if  that  is  the  way  you  conceive 


of  it.  But  let  us  rather  examine  your 
ministry  in  theological  terms  in  order 
that  your  image  of  the  ministry  may  be 
enriched  and  the  task  you  undertake  in 
the  Church  seen  in  a fuller  perspective. 

It  has  become  commonplace  to  say 
that  the  only  ministry  in  the  Church  is 
Christ’s  ministry  and  that  all  other  min- 
istries are  derivative  from  his.  I have 
never  quite  fully  understood  the  impli- 
cations of  this  remark,  which  is  usually 
uttered  with  a profundity  that  is  sup- 
posed to  end  all  argument.  But  let  us 
begin  our  argument  with  it  today. 

Christ’s  ministry  is  the  ministry  in 
the  Church.  The  ministry  of  the  laity, 
that  is  of  the  whole  people  of  God,  in- 
cluding you  and  me,  is  the  ministry  of 
witnessing  to  Jesus  Christ  to  which  we 
were  ordained  by  our  baptism.  So  far 
so  good.  The  specialized  ministry  of 
Word  and  Sacrament  to  which  you  and 
I have  been  called  in  the  Church  is  de- 
rived from  and  supportive  of  both  the 
ministry  of  Christ  and  of  that  of  all  of 
the  people  of  God.  When  we  are  ordained 
in  and  by  the  Church,  our  ministry  is 
not  new  and  different.  The  terms  of  the 
call  of  a minister  in  our  Church  (an  es- 
sential part  of  his  ordination)  include 
these  significant  words : “that  you  may 
be  free  from  worldly  care  and  avoca- 
tions.” The  reason  a congregation  un- 
dertakes to  pay  you  a salary  as  pastor  is 
neither  to  hire  you  to  be  something  dif- 


28 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


ferent  from  what  you  were  before  ordi- 
nation, nor  does  it  signify  any  radical 
change  in  your  ministry  from  that  of  the 
whole  people  of  God.  Rather  you  are 
freed  by  the  Church  for  study  and  serv- 
ice and  from  the  necessity  of  earning 
your  livelihood  in  some  “worldly”  way. 

To  understand  fully,  then,  what  you 
are  thus  called  to  do  and  to  be,  it  is 
necessary  to  look  at  Christ’s  own  min- 
istry as  a model  and  pattern.  In  our 
tradition  the  ministry  of  Christ  has  been 
usually  described  as  that  of  prophet, 
priest  and  King.  Calvin  writes  in  Book 
II,  Chapter  XV  of  The  Institutes : 
“The  office  enjoined  upon  Christ  by 
the  Father  consists  of  three  parts.  For 
he  was  given  to  be  prophet,  King  and 
priest.”  And  in  The  Confession  of  Faith 
of  our  Church  (VIII,  i),  one  reads, 
“It  pleased  God,  in  his  eternal  purpose, 
to  choose  and  ordain  the  Lord  Jesus, 
his  only  begotten  Son,  to  be  the  Media- 
tor between  God  and  man ; the  prophet, 
priest,  and  King.  . . .” 

If  then  the  office  of  the  minister  of 
Jesus  Christ  is  to  be  derived  from 
Christ’s  own  office  in  and  to  the  Church, 
let  us  look  at  our  ministry  together  to- 
day in  terms  of  prophet,  priest,  and 
King.  For  as  Calvin  goes  on  to  say  in 
The  Institutes,  “It  would  be  of  little 
value  to  know  these  names  without  un- 
derstanding their  purpose  and  use.” 

I 

In  what  sense  then  are  you  and  I 
called  by  the  Church  to  be  prophets? 
Essentially  according  to  Calvin  a proph- 
et is  one  who  sets  forth  “useful  doctrine 
sufficient  for  salvation”  (cf.  Inst.  Book 
II,  Ch.  XV).  This  broad  definition  will 
prevent  us  from  too  restricted  an  under- 
standing of  the  prophetic  role  of  the 
pastor  and  preacher.  Some  think  of  the 


prophet  solely  in  terms  of  an  Amos  or 
a Jeremiah,  thundering,  “Thus  saith 
the  Lord,”  to  a people  unwilling  to  lis- 
ten or  to  heed. 

But  it  is  much  wiser  to  think  of 
prophecy  more  broadly,  as  Calvin  sug- 
gests, as  setting  forth  the  gospel,  the 
good  news  of  God  in  Christ,  “sufficient 
for  salvation.”  This  will,  of  course,  in- 
clude “the  social  gospel,”  viz. : the  set- 
ting forth  of  the  word  as  it  applies  to 
the  life  of  the  Church  and  the  world  in 
terms  that  encourage  the  witness  in 
the  world  of  the  people  of  God.  But 
this  is  not  easy  to  do,  especially  for  a 
young  man.  Each  of  you  by  now  has 
achieved  some  political,  economic  and 
social  orientation.  Some  of  you  are  “lib- 
erals” in  all  of  these.  I doubt  not  that 
some  of  you  are  conservative,  not  to 
say  reactionary.  May  I humbly  suggest 
that  the  congregation  to  which  you  are 
called  will  be  profoundly  uninterested 
in  your  private  views,  liberal  or  con- 
servative, on  disarmament,  integration, 
the  profit  system,  or  the  United  Na- 
tions. What  your  congregation  has  a 
right  to  hear  from  you  is  the  gospel  of 
Jesus  Christ  set  forth  in  such  clear 
fashion  that  as  you  preach,  you  and 
they  together  see  the  light  of  salvation 
in  the  pilgrim  way  you  walk. 

If  you  think  of  prophecy  in  these 
terms,  you  will  find  that  you  will  not 
be  speaking  only  as  a counsellor  to  fear- 
ful people,  though  you  need  to  do  that, 
nor  only  as  a teacher  of  Christian  doc- 
trine, though  you  need  to  do  that,  nor 
only  as  a lone  voice  warning  of  God’s 
judgment  upon  a faithless  people,  al- 
though every  faithful  preacher  will  be 
required  from  time  to  time  to  do  that 
as  well. 

But  salvation  is  no  small  thing.  To 
speak  God’s  word  of  salvation  to  any 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


29 


1 people  will  require  all  of  your  knowl- 
: edge  and  study,  your  humility  and  pray- 
' er,  your  continued  learning  and  repeat- 
ed moments  of  high  courage. 

The  heart  of  what  I am  saying  is 
| that  to  be  a true  prophet  of  Jesus  Christ 
' and  his  gospel,  the  necessity  is  to  un- 
: dertake  to  speak  on  behalf  of  God  to  his 
j people.  This  is  no  easy  task.  Brash 
1 young  preachers  more  often  get  in  trou- 
1 ble  with  their  brashness  than  they  do 
with  the  gospel.  The  broader  and  deeper 
j your  study  of  the  gospel,  the  more  hum- 
| ble  you  are  about  your  own  opinions 
I and  the  surer  you  are  about  what  God 
has  done  and  is  doing  for  man’s  salva- 
i tion,  the  surer  you  are,  week  by  week, 
! to  have  something  persuasive  and  im- 
portant to  say  to  the  people  to  whom 
you  are  called  to  preach. 

The  danger  of  the  preacher-prophet 
is  when  he  begins  for  any  reason  to  try 
to  please  man  more  than  God,  or  when 
his  righteous  conviction  is  asserted  as 
his  own  word  to  the  people  rather  than 
God’s.  To  be  a prophet  is  an  impossible 
task.  Any  minister  of  Christ  who  does 
not  echo  again  and  again  in  his  own 
heart  Jeremiah’s  protest  at  God’s  choos- 
ing him  to  be  a prophet  has  not  really 
begun  his  ministry.  Jeremiah  said,  you 
remember,  “Oh,  Lord  God ! behold  I 
do  not  know  how  to  speak  for  I am 
only  a youth.”  And  thirty  years  from 
now,  if  you  remain  sensitive  to  your 
high  calling,  you  will  protest  in  your 
prayers,  “Behold,  I do  not  know  how 
to  speak  for  I am  only  a youth.” 

And  as  to  Jeremiah,  God’s  answer 
will  be,  “Do  not  say  T am  only  a youth’ 

. . . and  whatever  I command  you,  you 
will  speak.  . . . Behold  I have  put  my 
words  in  your  mouth.” 

God’s  words  of  reconciliation,  cour- 
age, love,  patience,  judgment,  and  sal- 


vation : this  is  your  high  prophetic  call- 
ing. No  work  is  harder  and  no  work 
more  thrilling.  If  you  so  look  at  your 
ministry,  you  will  not  be  confused, 
though  you  will  know  from  the  begin- 
ning that  it  is  more  than  you,  of  your 
own  ability  and  talent,  can  ever  accom- 
plish. And  each  Sunday  you  will  pray 
that  your  words  are  God’s  words  and 
that  the  salvation  you  proclaim  is  also 
his. 

II 

In  what  sense  is  a Presbyterian  min- 
ister to  be  a priest?  I am  profoundly 
weary  of  the  400  year  old  disputes  that 
continue  to  divide  the  Church  of  Jesus 
Christ  on  this  matter.  Of  course,  you 
are  not  a priest  who  controls  the  peo- 
ple’s access  to  God.  But  no  Catholic 
who  knows  his  best  tradition  believes 
that  either.  Let  us  have  done  with  an- 
cient controversy  and  examine  this  min- 
istry of  ours  in  terms  of  Christ’s  min- 
istry from  which  ours  must  be  derived. 
Let  us  be  very  clear  that  Christ  died 
upon  a cross  for  our  sins  and  for 
those  of  the  whole  world.  This  is  his 
once  and  for  all  accomplishment.  He 
alone,  after  the  order  of  Melchizedek, 
is  prophet,  priest  and  King,  the  sole 
mediator  between  God  and  man.  This 
we  accept  as  having  been  accomplished. 
But  positively  why  each  week  do  the 
people  of  God  gather  in  the  sanctuary? 
Why  are  you  called  upon  to  lead  this 
people  to  the  throne  of  grace?  In  what 
sense  is  yours  a priestly  ministry  ? What 
is  the  relationship  of  cult  to  ethics  or 
of  worship? 

If  one  were  to  put  his  finger  on  the 
chief  source  of  the  confusion  of  the 
American  Protestant  minister,  it  is  just 
here.  Most  Presbyterian  ministers  are 
at  a loss  really  to  relate  the  regular  wor- 


30 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


ship  of  Almighty  God,  its  hymns,  pray- 
ers and  sacraments,  to  the  scheme  of 
salvation  he  sets  forth  in  his  preaching. 
This  is  the  central  sickness  of  the 
American  Church  today. 

The  cure  to  this  sickness  will  not  be 
found  in  our  aping  the  outward  acts  of 
Catholic  priests.  Liturgical  gadgets  will 
not  transform  a Presbyterian  Service 
into  anything  more  useful.  Reverence 
and  worship  cannot  be  produced  by 
anything  less  than  the  consciousness  of 
the  presence  of  God  himself.  But  we  as 
Presbyterian  ministers  do  not  believe 
we  in  any  sense  control  or  contrive  that 
presence.  As  our  new  Directory  for  W or- 
ship  puts  it,  “In  worship  the  initiative 
lies  with  God”  (II,  i).  “In  public  wor- 
ship God  makes  known  among  his  peo- 
ple his  love  in  Jesus  Christ,  his  claim 
upon  their  lives,  his  abiding  presence 
with  them,  and  his  concern  for  all  crea- 
tion. . . .”  (Ibid).  And  our  Directory 
also  says,  “Those  ordained  to  the  min- 
istry of  Word  and  Sacraments  have 
entrusted  to  them  the  direction  and 
leading  of  public  worship”  (I,  4). 

This  “Christian  worship  is  . . . above 
all  ...  a corporate  response  by  the 
Church  to  God’s  mighty  act  of  redemp- 
tion in  Jesus  Christ”  (II,  2). 

If  you  and  I will  begin  to  think  of 
our  priestly  office  in  these  terms,  there 
can  be  a resurgence  of  life  and  joy  in 
the  public  worship  of  our  Church.  This 
task  of  leadership  to  which  you  are 
called  is  not  the  preliminary  to  your  ser- 
mon. The  worship  of  God  in  which  the 
minister,  with  reverence,  awe  and  due 
preparation  of  mind  and  spirit,  leads  a 
congregation  into  the  very  presence  of 
God  is  in  our  tradition  the  only  setting 
for  the  effectual  preaching  of  the  Word. 

I am  told  that  many  young  men,  sure 
of  their  call  to  Christ’s  ministry,  are  yet 


unsure  of  their  call  to  serve  as  pastor 
of  any  particular  Church.  “So  much  of 
what  the  churches  do,  budgets  and  Boy 
Scouts,  building  programs  and  dull  so- 
cial gatherings,  women’s  associations 
and  Sunday  School  picnics — what  has 
this  to  do  with  my  ministry?” 

Let  it  be  understood  that  every  job 
in  this  world  has  its  routine  and  unin- 
teresting aspects.  If  any  of  you  think 
my  task  in  the  Church  is  all  glamor, 
think  again.  Hours  of  committee  meet- 
ings and  days  and  nights  of  travel,  even 
abroad,  soon  lose  their  glamor.  But 
what  is  more  wonderful  than  week  by 
week  to  enter  a sanctuary,  to  lead  a 
people  who  have  come  there  voluntarily 
to  worship  God,  to  pray  and  sing,  to 
voice  praise  and  thanksgiving,  to  sit  in 
Christ’s  place  at  his  table,  to  preach  the 
word,  and  bless  the  people?  If  this  is 
your  work,  cannot  many  small  burdens 
be  carried  lightly  with  it? 

The  ministry  of  word  and  sacrament 
in  the  Presbyterian  Church  is,  in  our 
increasingly  organized  and  organiza- 
tional life,  one  of  the  few  callings  which 
is  centered  in  creative  human  and  hu- 
mane service.  How  can  any  young  man 
resist  a call  to  such  a ministry  ? To  com- 
pare it  to  being  a cog  in  a great  busi- 
ness, or  even  to  prefer  academic  teach- 
ing to  it,  is  profoundly  to  misconceive 
what  the  ministry  may  be  in  personal 
challenge  and  satisfaction,  in  deep  joy 
and  ultimate  meaning. 

Ill 

But  what  about  the  minister  being  a 
King?  You  will  have  noticed  that  I 
named  my  sermon  “Prophet  and  Priest, 
but  not  a King.”  By  this  topic  I did  not 
intend  to  imply  that  I would  reject  the 
third  part  of  the  traditional  understand- 
ing of  Christ’s  threefold  ministry. 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


3i 


But  I do  want  to  make  it  clear  that 
the  idea  that  a Presbyterian  minister  is 
in  any  sense  a “King”  is  false  and  mis- 
leading. In  other  days,  when  the  parson 
was  “the  person”  in  a community,  when 
discipline  in  the  Church  carried  with  it 
civil  penalties,  when,  as  in  Geneva,  Cal- 
vin sought  order  in  a revolutionary  age, 
there  may  have  been  excuse  for  making 
the  pastorate  appear  to  be  at  least  a pale 
reflection  of  our  Lord’s  rule  in  his 
Kingdom. 

It  is  equally  true  that  it  is  a profound 
misunderstanding  of  the  present  day 
pastor’s  role,  if  he  is  understood  to  be 
a boss  or  dictator  of  any  kind,  or  an 
executive  officer  with  authority  over  the 
people  of  his  congregation. 

Jesus  said  to  his  disciples,  “The 
Kings  of  the  nations  exercise  Lordship 
over  them ; and  those  in  authority  over 
them  are  called  Benefactors.  But  not  so 
with  you ; rather  let  the  greatest  among 
you  become  as  the  youngest,  and  the 
leader  as  one  who  serves.” 

Surely  the  ministry  of  word  and  sac- 
rament is  a kingly  ministry  too,  if  we 
will  in  our  understanding  of  it  accept 
Jesus’  radical  revolutionary  view  of 
Lordship  and  rule. 

I choose  this  text  from  Luke  rather 
than  the  more  familiar  one  in  Mat- 
thew, particularly  because  I am  speak- 
ing about  our  ministry  to  you  young 
men.  It  is  true  that  your  youth,  as  you 
begin  your  ministry,  is  a handicap  in 
your  role  of  prophet,  or  of  priest.  The 
years  add  wisdom  to  the  prophet,  and 
make  his  words  more  easily  accepted ; 
age  and  experience,  sickness,  sorrow, 
death — all  these  make  a man  a better 
priest.  But  here  our  Lord  suggests  that 


contrary  to  all  the  world’s  conception, 
a Christian  King  should  be  a youth,  that 
is  one  who,  because  of  junior  status, 
finds  it  natural  to  be  a servant — a min- 
ister. 

So  understood,  the  Kingly  ministry 
is  the  willingness  to  obedience  to  our 
Lord  to  serve  a whole  congregation  of 
people  one  by  one.  That  is  why,  when 
you  are  tired  you  will  make  that  hos- 
pital call  on  a lonely  invalid.  That  is 
why  you  will  give  yourself  to  the  poor, 
the  unlovable,  the  lonely,  and  the  rich. 
That  is  why  you  will  ring  doorbells  and 
call  upon  strangers,  so  that  they  may 
be  no  longer  strangers. 

We  are  told  that  the  driving  force  in 
American  life  is  status-seeking.  I am 
sure  all  of  us  are  human  and  ambitious 
enough  to  seek  some  status.  But  the 
status  of  a Christian  minister  is  always 
a junior  status,  “Let  the  greatest  among 
you  become  as  the  youngest,  and  the 
leader  as  one  who  serves.” 

If  throughout  your  ministry  you  will 
remember  this,  in  this  sense  only  try- 
ing to  retain  your  youth,  you  will  find 
that  this  is  an  ambition  which  can  be 
achieved — there  will  not  be  too  many 
seeking  your  place — you  will  find  that 
most  of  the  heartache  and  most  of  the 
bitterness  that  has  blighted  men’s  min- 
istries will  not  blight  yours  and  that  the 
end  will  be  as  thrilling  as  the  beginning. 

May  such  a ministry  be  yours.  And 
if  it  is,  it  will  be  crowned  by  successive 
generations  of  young  men  in  increasing 
numbers  and  quality  who,  having  seen 
the  reflection  of  our  Lord  in  you,  will 
also  hear  his  call  to  serve  him  in  the 
Church. 


CONVENTRY— JUNE  8,  1962 


Pain  is  in  everything — 
in  joy,  in  love,  in  life, 

(and  even  granite  is  alive). 

Only  death  is  painless 
though  the  approach  to  it 
sums  up  all  pain. 

The  tree  is  lacerated  by  the  woodman’s  axe  and  saw, 
the  wood  winces  under  the  driven  nail, 
the  asphalt  cracks  at  the  dandelion’s  upward  thrust 
to  light  and  air,  to  being-trodden-upon, 

its  flower  mangled  by  the  boot,  which,  bruising,  wears  away. 
Pain  everywhere. 

To  inflict  pain,  our  and  Nature’s  original  sin, 
to  be  expiated  in  appropriate  suffering. 

Appropriate ! 

Was  not  the  Carpenter  nailed  to  the  Tree? 

Pain  takes  its  place 

in  Coventry 

where  new  proportion 

fits  old  discords  into  unity, 

foretaste  and  sign  of  man  at  one  with  God 

in  painless  harmony. 

Pain  takes  its  place, 
is  reconciled  with  life 
where  Christ  is  seen  in  Glory. 


— T.  M.  Heron,  in  Frontier  (used  with  permission). 


FREEDOM  AND  TRADITION 
IN  PASTORAL  THEOLOGY 


Seward  Hiltner 


The  purpose  of  this  discussion  is 
to  examine  the  meaning  of  free- 
dom and  of  tradition  in  pastoral  theol- 
ogy, to  see  the  relationship  that  has  ex- 
isted between  them,  and  to  ask,  in  the 
light  of  reflective  meditation,  what  that 
relationship  should  be.  Some  prelimi- 
nary explanation  is  needed  about  the 
nature  of  pastoral  theology. 

The  Meaning  of  Pastoral  Theology 

As  the  term  “pastoral  theology”  has 
been  used  in  Protestant  circles  since  the 
latter  part  of  the  eighteenth  century,  it 
has  had  at  least  three  kinds  of  mean- 
ings. First,  it  has  referred  to  the  study 
of  the  theory  and  practice  of  the  care 
of  souls,  thus  being  almost  a synonym 
for  the  term  “poimenics.”  In  this  mean- 
ing, its  focus  is  the  theory  and  practice 
of  the  shepherding  function  of  the 
church,  and  of  the  minister  as  represen- 
tative of  the  church. 

Second,  “pastoral  theology”  has  re- 
ferred to  the  whole  theory  of  the  work 
of  the  minister,  including  homiletics, 
poimenics,  catechetics,  apostolics,  and 
so  on.  That  is,  instead  of  interpreting 
the  shepherding  function  of  the  church 
and  the  minister  as  applying  to  some 
kinds  of  activities  rather  than  to  others, 
this  second  conception  of  pastoral  theol- 
ogy has  assumed  that  shepherding,  as 
a metaphor,  is  the  central  conception 
around  which  all  the  activities  of  church 
and  pastor  are  organized,  and  is  the 
basis  of  the  theory  of  those  functions. 
During  the  nineteenth  century  there 
was  much  discussion  of  these  two  con- 


ceptions of  “pastoral  theology.”  The 
term  “practical  theology”  came  into 
wider  use  among  those  who  thought 
“pastoral  theology”  should  be  confined 
to  the  theory  of  only  some  types  of  func- 
tion. 

The  third  conception  of  “pastoral 
theology”  was  not  in  fact  a logical  alter- 
native to  either  of  the  first  two  notions 
already  indicated.  But  it  is  mentioned 
because  of  its  historical  significance.  Ac- 
cording to  this  conception,  “pastoral 
theology”  was  an  omnibus  kind  of  study 
of  the  work  of  the  church  and  the  min- 
ister, which  received  its  content  from 
the  biblical,  historical  and  doctrinal 
studies  and  then  applied  this  content 
to  the  actual  work  of  the  pastor.  By  the 
turn  of  our  century,  this  had  become  the 
dominant  conception.  In  seminaries  of 
the  more  liturgical  churches,  the  term 
“pastoral  theology”  was  retained.  In 
the  so-called  free  churches,  it  tended  to 
be  replaced  by  “practical  theology.” 
What  was  lost  from  the  nineteenth  cen- 
tury conceptions  was  the  conviction 
that  there  was  a theory  of  the  ministry, 
a theory  of  the  minister’s  operations, 
and  a theory  of  the  church’s  activity, 
and  that  this  theory  was  in  some  vital 
sense  related  to  practice.  What  was 
gained  in  the  movement  from  either  of 
the  first  two  ideas  to  the  third  was  of 
course  some  release  from  particular  and 
restricted  forms  in  which  the  theory  had 
become  embedded. 

Until  recently,  in  the  “free-church” 
tradition  (especially  Baptists),  the  idea 


34 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


of  a pastoral  theology  was,  for  all  prac- 
tical purposes,  a dead  issue.  Free-church 
ministers  who  had  their  theological  edu- 
cation before  1930  may  recall  a course 
on  “pastoral  theology”  as  an  omnibus 
and  usually  dry  consideration  of  how  to 
conduct  a wedding,  a funeral,  a finance 
campaign,  or  a tea.  They  will  recall  it 
as  “practical”  in  the  sense  that  no  vi- 
talizing theory  was  involved  in  it,  but 
as  impractical  as  far  as  any  specific  situ- 
ations, cases,  or  down  to  earth  consid- 
erations were  concerned.  The  vital  prac- 
tical courses  that  they  may  recall  from 
those  days  were  about  religious  educa- 
tion, which  seemed  to  have  cut  the  um- 
bilical cord  and  made  a fresh  start,  or 
of  practical  Christian  ethics,  in  which 
Christian  principles  were  used  so  as  to 
influence  the  world. 

In  my  discussion,  I want  to  renounce 
entirely  the  third  notion  of  “pastoral 
theology”  as  an  omnibus  consideration 
of  variegated  skills  unconnected  by  a 
fundamental  theory  on  the  one  side  or 
by  concrete  study  of  individual  situa- 
tions on  the  other  side.  This  tradition, 
it  should  be  noted,  is  not  dead ; and  it 
lives  on  precisely  in  those  churches  that 
call  themselves  “free.”  Every  year  sees 
many  books  and  articles  on  such  topics 
as  “the  work  of  the  minister,”  which 
float  in  some  anecdotal  no-man’s-land 
between  concrete  instance  and  basic 
principle  and  which  manage  to  avoid 
entangling  alliances  with  either.  Most 
of  the  new  critical  literature  on  the  na- 
ture of  the  ministry  has  appeared  since 
1953- 

But  I want  very  definitely  to  bring 
back  something  of  the  first  two  mean- 
ings of  “pastoral  theology.”  It  will  be 
recalled  that  the  first  of  these  is  differ- 
entiated from  the  second  in  its  limiting 
of  the  shepherding  focus  of  the  min- 


istry to  some  types  of  activities  rather 
than  extending  it  to  all,  as  did  the  sec- 
ond conception.  But  what  these  two  no- 
tions had  in  common,  against  the  third,  | 
was  the  conviction  that  a basic  theory 
was  required  for  the  functions  and 
operations.  It  is  this  fundamental  idea 
that  will  be  advocated  in  this  paper, 
whether  we  define  pastoral  theology  in 
the  narrower  sense  of  shepherding  pas- 
toral care  or  in  the  broader  sense  of 
the  total  shepherding  focus  of  all  the 
pastor’s  functions. 

As  between  conceptions  one  and  two, 

I am  strongly  inclined  to  take  the  first, 
which  sees  in  pastoral  theology  the  the- 
ory of  pastoral  operations  in  which  the 
shepherding  aspect  is  dominant  over 
other  aspects,  and  which  therefore  be- 
comes a comprehensive  theory  of  Chris- 
tian pastoral  care.  But  one  must  retain 
from  the  second  theory  the  notion  that 
every  function  of  the  church  or  minis- 
ter has  shepherding  implications,  even 
though  rejecting  the  imperialistic  idea 
that  the  shepherding  focus  is  always  the 
most  important  one.  With  such  a posi- 
tion, it  becomes  possible  for  me  to 
speak  of  pastoral  theology  as  the  theory 
of  shepherding  pastoral  operations  or 
functions,  and  thus  to  be  relatively  con- 
crete in  what  I am  focusing  on ; while 
at  the  same  time  I am  forced  to  see  that 
the  shepherding  dimensions  of  the  pas- 
tor’s functions  go  beyond  his  activities 
in  pastoral  care.  So  long  as  these  actu- 
alities are  kept  in  mind,  it  becomes  a 
mere  terminological  problem  as  to  what 
“pastoral  theology”  denotes. 

Thesis  of  the  Article 

All  this,  to  be  sure,  sounds  very  ab- 
stract ; and  it  would  not  be  put  in  this 
way  unless  I considered  it  an  essential 
preliminary  to  my  main  points  about 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


35 


freedom  and  tradition  in  pastoral  the- 
ology. Let  me  now  give  my  thesis,  stated 
first  in  negative,  and  then  in  positive, 
terms.  Here  is  the  negative  statement 
of  the  thesis.  The  omnibus  conception 
of  pastoral  theology,  which  is  neither 
theoretical  nor  concrete,  must  be  re- 
nounced in  all  its  forms  in  relation  to 
pastoral  care  in  particular  and  to  the 
operations  of  the  pastor  and  church  in 
general.  And  here  is  the  positive  state- 
ment. The  conception  of  pastoral  theol- 
ogy as  involving  a basic  theory  of  the 
minister’s  or  church’s  operations,  but 
transcending  in  content  all  previous  pas- 
toral theologies,  must  be  developed  both 
in  the  particular  shepherding  functions 
and  in  the  general  operations  of  the  pas- 
tor and  the  church.  I shall  try  to  explain 
and  defend  these  theses,  and  to  suggest 
that  the  greatest  threat  to  their  realiza- 
tion lies  within  the  so-called  “free” 
churches. 

In  their  desire  to  find  release  from 
dead  aspects  of  tradition,  the  so-called 
“free”  churches  have  buried  some 
corpses  that  were  only  apparently  dead. 
What  happens  then  is  not  merely  com- 
plaint about  the  small  size  of  the  living 
population,  but  is  also  the  emergence  of 
a new  and  uncriticized  tradition  whose 
traditional  character  goes  unrecognized 
because,  in  content,  it  is  unlike  that  from 
which  release  was  sought.  Let  me  be 
more  specific,  and  cite  some  parallels. 

Preaching 

In  the  field  of  homiletics,  for  exam- 
ple, one  of  the  achievements  of  the  past 
half  century  is  the  Beecher  Lectures  on 
preaching  at  the  Yale  Divinity  School. 
The  most  renowned  preachers,  and 
teachers  of  preaching,  in  each  decade 
are  faithfully  recorded  in  their  Beecher 
Lectures.  And  what  does  one  find?  He 


finds  some  who  emphasize  the  basic 
content  of  the  Christian  gospel  that  the 
preacher  is  trying  to  communicate  to  his 
people ; and  others  who  stress  the  skills, 
the  art,  or  the  techniques  of  preaching. 
What  he  will  not  find  throughout  the 
Beecher  series  is  a basic  treatment  on 
homiletics,  the  basic  theory  of  the  oral 
communication  of  the  Word,  dynami- 
cally linked  and  related  to  concrete  con- 
texts in  which  the  function  of  preach- 
ing takes  place.  The  hearer  or  reader  of 
these  lecturers  and  books  may  well  be 
inspired  about  new  insights  into  the 
meaning  of  the  gospel,  and  may  get 
some  excellent  technique  suggestions 
on  constructing  sermons ; but  what  he 
will  not  get  is  a basic  theory  about  the 
meaning  and  function  of  preaching  in 
relation  to  concrete  contexts  in  which 
the  activity  takes  place.  He  may  get  in- 
formation about  the  gospel,  inspiration 
on  its  human  relevance,  and  useful  tech- 
niques ; that  is,  his  knowledge,  his  feel- 
ing, and  his  gimmicks  may  be  touched. 
But  his  intellect,  in  the  sense  of  culti- 
vating a basic  theory  of  homiletics  that 
informs  actual  situations,  and  learning 
from  concrete  situations  what  will  cor- 
rect and  deepen  the  basic  theory,  will 
not  be  touched.  Since  he  has  never  had 
any  homiletics  in  this  sense  anyhow, 
the  free-church  minister  will  not  know 
there  is  anything  missing.  And  if  he 
is  taken  to  task  by  the  more  conserva- 
tive brother,  he  is  likely  to  be  as  much 
repelled  by  the  aridity  and  formalism 
of  the  latter’s  homiletical  theory  as  he 
is  by  the  conception  of  the  message  to 
be  preached. 

Religious  Education 

Or  consider  what,  in  the  large,  has 
happened  to  the  free-churches  in  the 
field  of  religious  education.  It  was  in- 


36 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


dividuals  in  these  churches,  and  later 
the  churches  themselves,  that  had  the 
courage  to  look  at  John  Dewey’s  basic 
idea  that  learning  occurs  only  as  inter- 
ests are  touched,  and  to  begin  the  con- 
struction of  a theory  of  religious  educa- 
tion that  rejected  a pattern  of  imposition 
and  tried  to  become  what  we  should 
now  call  “existential.”  But  three  things 
happened  within  this  movement,  even 
though  these  remarks  should  not  be 
construed  as  a denial  of  genuine  prog- 
ress that  we  have  made  in  religious  edu- 
cation. First,  the  Bible  and  the  Chris- 
tian heritage  tended  to  become  source 
books  for  illustrations,  rather  than,  in 
some  basic  sense,  normative  for  bring- 
ing us  the  relevation  of  God  in  Christ. 
Second,  the  religious  educators  devoted 
so  much  time  to  expounding  those  as- 
pects of  their  theory  that  rejected  the 
old  patterns  of  imposition  that  they 
failed  to  become  concrete ; and  the 
practical  people  who  had  to  do  the  con- 
crete job,  as  a result,  often  made  serious 
distortions  of  the  new  movement.  Third, 
a religious  education  orthodoxy  arose 
which,  because  it  regarded  itself  as  pro- 
gressive, was  unusually  dogmatic  in  its 
resistance  either  to  old  truth  that  had 
been  overlooked  or  new  truth  that  was 
emerging. 

Within  these  past  few  years,  in  Chris- 
tian education  as  in  homiletics,  I firmly 
believe  something  new  is  appearing : 
firm  theory  related  to  concrete  practice, 
solid  reliance  upon  revelation  along 
with  a critical  but  appreciative  use  of 
social  science. 

Church  Administration 

If  I appear  critical  of  our  betrayal  of 
homiletics  and  catechetics,  my  com- 
ments on  church  administration  will 
seem  devastating.  So  far  has  this  sub- 


ject moved  in  the  direction  of  gimmicks 
that  it  may  even  be  a surprise  that  it 
could  be  thought  of  as  anything  else. 
But  consider : The  administrative  or 
executive  functions  of  the  church  or 
pastor  are  the  cohering  functions,  what 
holds  things  together,  what,  in  a con- 
crete sense,  makes  an  operating  and,  we 
hope,  transforming  fellowship  out  of  the 
whole  business.  Is  there  anything  Chris- 
tian about  the  bases  upon  which  the 
church  ought  to  be  held  together?  Are 
there  ways  of  achieving  fellowship  that 
Christianity  must  renounce,  and  other 
ways  that  it  must  cultivate  despite  risks 
and  obstacles?  This  is  not  of  course  to 
imply,  here  or  anywhere  else,  that  there 
are  not  valuable  things  to  be  learned 
from  secular  experience  of  many  kinds. 
But  what  order  of  such  experience  is 
likely  to  be  relevant  ? Do  we  learn  about 
the  financial  coherence  of  the  Christian 
fellowship  from  the  analogy  of  high- 
pressure  community  fund  campaigns? 
Or  do  we  look  to  the  best  secular 
thought  and  experience  on  how  to  make 
an  enterprise  cohere,  which  moves  far 
beyond  the  gimmick  stage?  The  fact  is 
that  our  theory  of  church  administra- 
tion, if  such  a thing  exists  at  all,  is  out 
of  touch  with  the  most  basic  secular 
experience  and  thought  along  these 
lines. 

At  the  same  time  there  is  this  notable 
absence  of  any  Christian  or  basic  the- 
ory of  administration  within  the  church, 
the  institutional  complexities  of  church 
life  have  increased  many  fold ; and  the 
pastor,  as  executive  coherer  of  this  en- 
terprise, is  pushed  to  the  utmost  in  a 
degree  that  even  a Richard  Baxter 
could  not  conceive.  If  we  have  no  open 
and  basic  theory  of  all  this,  it  does  not 
mean  that  no  theory  is  in  operation. 
What  it  means,  instead,  is  that  there  is 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


37 


a sub  rosa  theory,  uncriticized,  accept- 
ing the  gimmick  aspects  of  secular  ad- 
ministrative experience  without  the 
growing  body  of  principles,  and  totally 
unconscious  of  the  fact  that  Christian 
administration  requires  a Christian  the- 
ory if  it  is  to  be  Christian.  I sometimes 
think  that  administration  within  the 
churches  is  becoming  the  last  frontier 
of  obscurantism. 

Pastoral  Care 

Or  consider  my  own  field  of  pastoral 
care,  and  the  narrower  definition  of 
pastoral  theology  as  the  shepherding 
function  of  the  ministry  that  is  more 
in  evidence  in  some  types  of  activity 
than  in  others.  Here  too  we  are  far 
from  blameless,  although  our  recent 
record  seems  to  be,  in  some  respects, 
better  than  that  of  some  others  that  have 
been  mentioned.  At  the  turn  of  the  cen- 
tury, the  chief  element  in  the  theory  of 
pastoral  care  could  be  called  “assidu- 
ity.” The  exhortations  to  wear  out  shoe 
leather,  and  later  automobile  tires,  were 
certainly  not  irrelevant.  But  they  con- 
tained the  hidden  assumption  that  pas- 
toral care  is  not  genuinely  interesting, 
that  it  is  principally  a duty  to  be  per- 
formed to  earn  the  right  to  the  inter- 
esting aspects  of  the  church’s  work  and 
ministry.  Nor  are  we  free  of  this  yet. 

During  the  1920’s  and  since,  how- 
ever, has  come  a collection  of  move- 
ments proclaiming  from  the  bedside  and 
study  that  there  is  no  more  interesting 
aspect  of  the  ministry  than  pastoral 
care.  Psychology  has  come  to  our  aid. 
By  being  able  to  understand  something 
of  what  our  relationship  with  them  can 
mean,  we  make  contact  with  the  vitali- 
ties of  actual  helping  relationships  as 
never  before.  This  is  new  and  very  posi- 
tive. 


But  is  pastoral  care,  then,  simply  the 
way  the  minister  applies  psychology, 
strictly  coordinate  with  the  way  the  so- 
cial worker  or  psychiatrist  might  apply 
psychology?  Are  the  new  findings  so 
completely  adequate  that  we  can  simply 
continue  to  borrow  a few  leaves  from 
the  books  of  the  psychoanalyst  and  his 
relatives,  being  careful  of  course,  to  say 
frequently  and  loudly  that  we  are  not 
psychoanalysts  or  psychiatrists?  Or  is 
our  pastoral  care  function,  with  all  the 
valuable  new  insights  we  now  have  in 
connection  with  it,  still  to  be  understood 
in  some  basic  sense  on  which  psychiatry 
and  its  brethren  have  little  light  to 
shed?  Do  we  need  to  develop  a new 
basic  theory  of  pastoral  care  that  in- 
cludes the  modern  insights  but  that 
belongs  explicitly  within  the  tradition 
of  Christian  ministry?  Ever  since  I 
have  been  peddling  this  particular  pill, 
during  the  past  twenty  years  or  so,  I 
have  been  getting  a positive  response 
from  the  pastors  of  the  more  liturgical 
churches.  I am  still  uncertain  as  to  the 
response  from  the  ministers  of  the  free 
churches.  In  so  far  as  they  want  to 
avoid  going  back  to  any  authoritarian 
tradition  in  pastoral  care,  plainly  I am 
with  them.  But  in  so  far  as  they  seem 
fearful  of  looking  back  anywhere  at 
anything,  then  the  fact  is  that  their 
theory  of  pastoral  care  is  still  one  of 
disorganized  assiduity  covered  by  drib- 
lets of  unrelated  psychological  insight. 
As  such,  it  is  not  deep  or  relevant 
enough  for  the  needs  of  our  day. 

Toward  a Theory  of  Functions 

Let  us  try  to  state  what,  generally 
speaking,  has  happened  to  these  func- 
tions or  operations,  and  to  the  study  of 
them.  Within  the  group  of  churches 
that  are  more  liturgical,  or  more  con- 
servative, or  more  structured  in  form 


38 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


and  polity,  there  was  greater  initial  re- 
sistance to  the  inclusion  of  any  insights 
from  modern  knowledge  into  the  basic 
theory  of  the  work  of  church  and  min- 
ister. Experimentation  was  undertaken 
more  slowly  and  reluctantly,  and  in  its 
early  phases  tended  to  discount  any  re- 
lationship between  the  experiments  and 
basic  theory  or  structure.  But  as  time 
has  gone  on,  it  is  precisely  these 
churches  that  have  become  most  active 
in  their  experimentation,  and  are  in- 
creasingly convinced  that,  while  this 
may  change  some  basic  theory,  it  will 
not  alter  it  in  an  unchristian  direction. 

The  free  churches,  on  the  other  hand, 
went  for  the  new  insights  much  earlier. 
Feeling  confined  by  the  old  structures 
of  a formalized  but  undynamic  pastoral 
theology  (or  homiletics,  or  social  teach- 
ing, etc.),  they  moved  toward  release 
from  those  patterns.  Convinced  that 
they  were  progressive,  they  proclaimed 
their  own  freedom  as  the  tradition  en- 
abling them  to  slough  off  the  outworn 
irrelevancies  and  to  seek  the  new.  So 
long  as  the  new  was  something  never 
heard  of  before,  they  had  no  conflict  in 
accepting  it.  But  when  the  new  turned 
out,  at  times,  to  be  a rediscovery  of 
something  previously  shuffled  off,  the 
situation  was  different.  Most  especially 
does  this  seem  to  be  true  in  our  redis- 
covery of  the  conviction  that  there  must 
be  a basic  theory  and  structure  of  opera- 
tions, and  not  merely  an  unrelated  col- 
lection of  truths  or  insights  or  tech- 
niques. So  they  pay  lip  service  to  a the- 
ory of  the  functions  of  church  and  min- 
ister, but  do  not  wrestle  with  the  ma- 
terial out  of  which  any  significant  the- 
ory must  emerge.  So  much  impressed 
with  the  pit  from  which  they  have  been 
digged,  they  hesitate  to  enter  any  mine 
lest  it  too  prove  to  be  a pit. 


To  some  extent  what  is  said  exag- 
gerates, for  there  are  outstanding  ex- 
ceptions to  these  trends.  And  the  point 
is  certainly  not  to  drive  free  churchmen 
into  unfreedom.  But  if  there  is  fear  of 
any  depth  because  what  one  has  been 
freed  from  was  an  unpleasant  depth, 
then  the  result  is  likely  to  be  a dogmatic 
superficialism. 

So  far  as  the  functions  and  operations 
of  the  pastor  and  church  are  concerned, 
what  the  previous  generation  had  to 
free  itself  from  was  an  arid  and  un- 
dynamic theory  and  structure  that  im- 
peded the  discovery  of  new  and  vital 
content.  But  having  freed  itself  from  the 
old  theory,  the  new  and  vital  content 
was  absorbed  only  in  chunks,  as  if  the 
digestive  process  leading  to  a more  basic 
theory  and  structure  were  now  un- 
necessary. So  even  the  originally  vital 
content  began  to  lose  its  dynamic  mean- 
ing; and  discussions  could  be  had  on 
whether,  for  example,  there  was  too 
much  or  too  little  stress  on  pastoral 
counseling  or  religious  education  or 
evangelism.  Efforts  to  rediscover  vital- 
ity in  preaching  were  made  either  in  an 
inspirational  manner,  or  in  purely  doc- 
trinal terms,  with  no  sense  that  even 
the  vitality  of  preaching  was  an  im- 
possibility without  a basic  homiletic  the- 
ory and  structure.  And  so  there  arose 
two  tendencies  that  appear  to  be  far 
apart,  but  which  are  actually  two  as- 
pects of  the  same  misunderstanding : on 
the  one  side,  those  who  frankly  go  for 
the  gimmicks,  and  on  the  other  side, 
those  who  believe  vitality  comes  only 
through  content  and  doctrine  and  Bible 
and  in  no  way  through  the  functions 
themselves.  Both  views  fail  to  under-  f i 
stand  that  a theory  of  operations,  firm 
but  not  rigid,  open  but  not  jelly-like,  is 
essential  to  vitality  of  function.  If  it 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


39 


does  not  cohere,  it  is  likely  to  be  inco- 
herent ; and  if  it  is  not  stated,  it  is  likely 
to  have  all  the  unpredictable  devilish- 
ness of  a repression. 

You  will  recall  that  my  negative 
statement  of  thesis  was  this : that  the 
omnibus  conception  of  pastoral  theology 
(in  whatever  sense  that  be  defined)  be 
done  away  with  for  good.  And  the  posi- 
tive statement : that  a basic  theory  of  I 
the  operations  of  the  minister  and  the 
church,  both  in  particular  and  in  gen- 
eral, must  be  created,  and  must  relate 
to  concrete  experience.  Perhaps  at  least 
the  meaning  of  the  thesis  is  now  clearer. 

How  do  I learn  about  pastoral  theol- 
ogy, either  in  the  narrower  shepherding 
sense,  or  as  the  general  theory  of  opera- 
tions of  pastor  and  church?  According 
to  my  thesis,  it  is  never  enough  to  learn 
this  through  gimmicks  of  any  kind  or 
degree,  even  though  the  ability  to  con- 
struct relevant  gimmicks  is  of  great 
importance.  But  neither  is  this  to  be 
learned  merely  by  studying  Bible,  doc- 
trine, history,  or  what  not,  and  then  ap- 
plying it  to  specific  situations.  In  both 
instances,  the  energetic  and  dynamic 
connection  between  concrete  experience 
and  basic  theory  is  denied ; and  the  es- 
sential two-way  movement  is  not  culti- 
vated. Actually,  we  learn  to  construct 
a theory  of  operations  out  of  disciplined 
reflection  on  concrete  experience,  which 
reflection  in  turn  is  brought  to  bear  on 
the  critical  understanding  of  the  con- 
crete experience,  and  so  on  back  and 
forth.  The  richer  the  concrete  experi- 
ence, the  more  basic  the  theory  that  is 
suggested  by  it.  The  more  basic  the 
theory,  the  deeper  or  broader  are  the 
capacities  to  penetrate  concrete  experi- 
ence. 

Let  me  see  if  I can  make  the  issue 
“existential”  for  you.  Suppose  that  some 


member  of  your  congregation  is  a gen- 
uine industrial  statesman,  and  that  he 
comes  to  you  with  some  such  statement 
as  this.  “George,  in  my  industry  I have 
found  that  what  I have  to  pursue  to 
make  it  work — to  work  for  the  work- 
ers, for  the  executives,  and  for  the  con- 
sumer of  the  products — is  a basic  theory 
of  industrial  operations  today.  What 
equivalent  to  this  do  you  have  in  the 
church,  that  is  uniquely  appropriate  to 
the  operations  of  a church  as  we  think 
our  theory  is  getting  to  be  for  a respon- 
sible industry?”  What  would  your  an- 
swer be? 

Of  course  I know  you  would  say,  and 
properly,  that  the  church  is  in  some 
sense  a community  of  those  who  would 
be  faithful,  or  those  to  whom  Christ  has 
spoken,  and  so  on.  That  is,  the  first  an- 
swer would  properly  be  doctrinal,  or 
biblical,  or  historical.  But  suppose  our 
friend  pressed  you,  saying,  “Of  course 
I understand  that.  That’s  why  you  exist 
at  all.  That’s  your  foundation,  source, 
and  end.  And  it’s  important.  But  what 
does  this  mean  for  a daily  theory  of 
operations  ? What  does  it  say  about  the 
meaning  of  preaching  in  the  whole  en- 
terprise, and  how  it  is  conducted  ? Have 
you  any  theory  of  that  kind?  In  our 
enterprise  we  are  developing  one,  strict- 
ly because  we  can’t  operate  properly 
without  a critical  theory  of  operations.” 
I wager  there  would  be  none  of  us  who 
would  feel  adequately  prepared  to  reply 
to  this  question.  About  this  ignorance 
I do  not  care  ; it  is  understandable.  What 
I would  hit  hard  is  any  obscurantism 
that  denied  any  importance  to  attempts 
to  become  unignorant. 

The  Theology  in  Pastoral  Theology 

A final  point.  Even  if  you  have  fol- 
lowed me  up  to  this  point,  and  agree 


40 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


that  we  need  a basic  theory  of  the  op- 
erations of  pastor  and  church  emerging 
out  of  creative  interaction  between  con- 
crete experience  and  reflective  symboli- 
zation of  it,  you  may  still  wonder  why 
I have  resurrected  the  notion  of  “pas- 
toral theology’’  to  denote  at  least  one 
aspect  of  this.  Where  is  the  theology, 
you  may  be  asking? 

My  final  contention  is  that,  in  so  far 
as  we  follow  this  kind  of  concern  and 
procedure,  we  are  moving  toward  the 
constructing  or  discovery  of  theology  as 
knowledge  of  God  in  as  basic  a sense  as 
is  done  by  the  systematic  theologian. 
We  are  doing,  for  some  aspects  of  ex- 
perience, what  he  attempts  to  do  for 
all  aspects  of  our  experience.  If  this 
dimension  is  not  explicitly  recognized 
in  our  operations,  then  we  are  mere- 
ly speakers,  counselors,  salesmen,  or 
group  leaders  who  happen  to  operate  in 
a certain  kind  of  sociological  or  ideo- 
logical setting. 

I have  nothing  against  good  speak- 
ing, salesmanship,  counseling  or  group 
leadership.  But  if  there  is  not  a reflec- 
tive theory  of  these  things  explicitly 
theological  in  character,  what  tends  to 
happen?  There  may  be  little  or  no  ac- 
quaintance with  the  depths  inherent,  for 
example,  in  many  pastoral  relationships  ; 
only  the  surface  may  be  seen.  This  is, 
with  any  good  man,  not  likely  to  last 
long;  for  the  depths  force  themselves 
upon  him.  But  what  then?  Suppose  him 
to  be  involved  in  some  deeply  meaning- 
ful experience,  such  as  with  a person 
who  fights  off  death  or  bitter  despair. 
The  pastor  is  deeply  moved.  But  he  may 
then  generalize  from  this  in  a way  that 
enables  him  to  be  related  to  the  next 
person  only  sentimentally,  as  if  every 
crisis  of  every  person  were  to  be  evalu- 
ated by  the  terms  learned  in  dealing 


with  the  first.  If  he  has  no  general  the- 
ory of  operations,  theologically  oriented 
at  both  ends,  he  is  unlikely  to  have  ade- 
quate standards,  and  may  fall  at  times 
into  sentimentalism,  superficiality  or 
hard-boiledness. 

None  of  these  dire  results  is  neces- 
sary. But  if  they  are  to  become  unneces- 
sary, then  there  must  be  a wrestling 
with  operations  at  the  level  of  theologi- 
cal theory.  Let  me,  in  closing,  illustrate 
with  a brief  reference  to  funerals.  One 
of  our  advanced  students  who  studied 
funerals  reached  the  conclusion,  among 
others,  that  most  of  the  reforms  recent- 
ly agitated  among  ministers  in  relation 
to  funerals  were  based  on  the  aesthetic 
sensitivities  of  the  ministers,  which 
might  or  might  not  be  related  to  the 
needs  of  the  people  or  the  understand- 
ing of  the  gospel.  We  may  indeed  be 
critical  of  those  undertakers  who  inter- 
pret meeting  the  needs  of  the  people  in 
pandering  terms,  or  who  at  times  make 
a travesty  of  the  gospel.  But  are  not  our 
own  aesthetic  sensibilities  inadequate 
criteria  for  examining  the  whole  busi- 
ness? What,  specifically,  is  our  basic 
theory  of  a Christian  funeral  as  an  op- 
eration or  function  of  the  Christian 
church  ? How  clear  are  we  about  it  ? 

Elsewhere  in  the  world,  Christians 
are  likely  to  refer  to  us  as  too  practical 
or  activistic  in  America.  Yet  what  my 
thesis  implies  is  that  we  have  failed  to 
push  genuine  practicality  to  the  point 
where  it  makes  a contribution  to  basic 
theory,  even  theological  theory.  So  the 
practicality  we  actually  possess  must  be 
a deficient  kind,  a sort  of  pseudo-prac- 
ticality, a practicality  of  the  gimmick. 
This  is  not  alone  to  be  cured,  as  I see 
it,  by  a more  profound  penetration  of 
doctrine,  of  the  Bible,  or  of  Christian 
history,  important  as  those  things  are. 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


4i 


' We  need  also  to  reach  for  a basically 
theological  theory  within  our  operations 
themselves,  so  that  the  operations  il- 
luminate our  theological  understanding 
and  our  theological  understanding  actu- 


ally shapes  our  operations.  To  move  in 
this  direction  will  be  to  state  a Christian 
pastoral  theology  for  our  day  that  is 
worthy  to  stand  beside  the  Christian 
constructive  theology  that  is  emerging. 


Modern  biblical  theology  has  rightly  made  it  its  concern  that  biblical  terminology  should 
be  seen  ‘within  the  context  of’  biblical  thought  as  a whole.  But  it  is  a misuse  of  this  prin- 
ciple to  apply  it  to  words,  in  such  a way  that  the  relating  of  the  word  to  features  of  the 
general  context  of  biblical  thought  replaces  the  examination  of  its  actual  syntactical  con- 
text. The  general  theological  context  can  never  in  the  slightest  degree  be  a substitute  for  the 
syntactical  environment.  Only  within  their  syntactical  environment  do  words  function.  Where 
this  is  neglected,  we  may  produce  studies  which  quote  Greek  and  Hebrew  words  in  every 
sentence  and  which  clamorously  insist  on  the  pursuit  of  biblical  terminology,  but  which  in 
fact  are  not  dealing  with  biblical  language  at  all. 

— ’James  Barr,  in  Biblical  Words  for  Time,  Allenson,  1962,  p.  154. 


RENEWAL  THROUGH  WITNESS 

George  W.  Webber 


Paul  wrote  to  the  Corinthians,  “For 
I decided  to  know  nothing  among 
you  except  Jesus  Christ  and  him  cruci- 
fied.” Our  concern  is  with  the  content 
of  this  affirmation,  for  it  also  defines 
the  meaning  of  witness  for  the  congre- 
gation today.  When  Paul  seems  to  limit 
the  arena  of  his  concern  to  “nothing 
except  Jesus  Christ  and  him  crucified,” 
he  is  in  fact  setting  up  a kind  of  um- 
brella under  which  he  had  the  right  to 
talk  about  all  of  life  for  the  meaning 
of  every  part  of  it  is  to  Christ.  Paul  in- 
tended to  witness  to  Christ;  that  was 
his  business  and  nothing  more;  but  it 
was  not  a narrow  or  confining  task. 

The  task  of  the  congregation  is  wit- 
ness also  in  this  sense.  All  that  it  does 
and  says  must  point  to  Christ,  to  his 
life  and  death  and  resurrection.  As  D. 
T.  Niles  has  suggested  somewhere,  the 
Christian  is  not  an  objective  witness 
who  stands  apart  from  the  event  to 
which  he  testifies,  like  a man  watching 
a traffic  accident.  He  is  himself  involved 
as  an  active  participant  in  the  event.  He 
becomes  part  of  the  gospel,  for  Christ 
has  taken  hold  of  him  to  make  him  a 
witness.  He  must  himself  share  in  the 
life  and  death  and  resurrection  of  his 
lord. 

The  Dimensions  of  Witness 

Instead  of  using  the  familiar  three 
dimensions  of  evangelism  ( diakonia , 
koinonia,  kerygma ) as  a way  of  describ- 
ing the  various  aspects  of  witness,  let  us 
examine  the  task  of  the  congregation  in 
the  light  of  the  Christ’s  life.  Thus  our 


section  headings  become  incarnation, 
crucifixion,  and  resurrection. 

i.  Witness  to  the  Incarnation:  The 
Incarnation  was  a life  lived  not  in  the 
circumscribed  confines  of  a religious  or- 
ganization, but  in  the  midst  of  the  world. 
Christ  came  into  the  world,  not  the 
Church,  and  for  the  sake  of  the  world. 
The  Church  in  our  time  has  lost  the 
truth  of  the  Incarnation  and  has  re- 
treated into  the  privatized  circle  of  lei- 
sure time  and  family,  making  religion 
into  one  of  the  twenty-two  sections  of 
Time  Magazine  and  generally  unrelated 
to  most  vital  areas  of  human  life.  The 
tension  between  Christ  and  culture  is 
not  a problem,  sure  sign  that  the  church 
is  not  alive  in  the  midst  of  the  world. 

To  live  by  the  Incarnation  is  to  par- 
ticipate fully  as  a human  being  in  the 
midst  of  the  world.  The  phrase  “Holy 
Worldliness”  points  to  the  proper  em- 
phasis for  our  time,  cutting  across  the 
distinction  between  sacred  and  secular, 
and  bringing  faith  again  into  the  mar- 
ket place. 

There  are  many  concrete  aspects  of 
such  genuine  participation.  The  first  is 
described  by  the  work  presence,  truly 
present  in  the  world  seen  as  one  lives  in 
obedience  to  the  king  of  heaven.  For 
clergy,  it  is  hard  to  be  present  in  the 
world  as  open,  responsive  human  be- 
ings. We  almost  certainly  hide  behind 
our  ecclesiastical  role.  When  the  East 
Harlem  Protestant  Parish  was  begin- 
ning, we  were  terribly  concerned  about 
how  to  communicate  the  Gospel  to  the 
people  in  East  Harlem.  With  all  the 
barriers  of  class  and  culture  and  lan- 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


43 


guage,  how  could  we  somehow  figure 
out  a way  to  get  through  to  these  peo- 
ple? So  we  hired  a very  sensitive  per- 
son to  come  and  live  in  the  community 
and  study  this  problem — how  could  we, 
white,  middle-class  Seminary-trained 
clergy,  communicate  to  the  people  of 
East  Harlem  ? How  could  we,  in  effect, 
learn  enough  about  them  so  we  could 
get  the  message  across?  After  a couple 
months  she  came  and  said,  “Forget  it, 
you  got  the  problem  all  wrong.  There’s 
no  hope  as  long  as  you’re  going  to  be 
ministers,  all  seeing,  all  knowing,  om- 
niscient, standing  on  the  bank  of  East 
Harlem  watching  this  floodtide  of  hu- 
manity sweeping  by,  determined  to  do 
good  at  any  cost.  Until  you  get  in  and 
are  part  of  that  world,  if  it’s  possible 
for  you  to  become  part  of  that  world 
(she  wasn’t  convinced  it  was),  and  live 
by  the  Incarnation,  then  you  won’t  have 
a problem  of  communication.”  And  I 
think  she  was  right.  The  starting  point 
was  not  some  kind  of  determination  to 
help  people,  but  the  willingness  to  live 
in  the  middle  of  their  world  and  share 
in  as  many  of  its  dimensions  as  possible. 
The  Christian  does  not  stand  safely  in 
the  shelter  of  the  Church  and  throw 
life  rings  out  to  drowning  men,  but  is 
one  who  jumps  into  the  torrents  of  life 
and  with  his  arm  around  the  drowning 
man  points  to  the  place  where  they  both 
find  their  salvation.  There  is  no  other 
way  but  participation,  to  live  by  the  In- 
carnation which  means  to  be  truly  pres- 
ent in  the  world  where  God  is  at  work 
in  Jesus  Christ. 

Integral  with  presence  is  the  ability 
to  listen  to  the  world.  The  Church  has 
got  to  stop  approaching  the  world  as 
though  it  had  pre-packaged  answers 
for  all  the  world’s  problems,  and  in- 
stead, learn  with  humility  to  listen  to  its 


travail,  and  in  the  light  of  what  it  hears, 
seek  with  new  urgency  to  discover 
God’s  word  and  will  for  that  specific 
context.  But  this  experience  of  listening 
is  so  uncommon,  not  least  of  all  for 
clergy,  that  it  is  hard  to  describe.  For 
me,  the  best  glimpse  into  the  meaning 
of  genuine  listening  came  through  John 
Genzel,  a Lutheran  pastor  in  New  York 
City,  who  has  been  assigned  half  time 
as  a minister  to  jazz  musicians.  Al- 
though his  work  sounded  a little  off- 
beat and  esoteric,  I was  curious  to  find 
out  more  about  it.  His  witness  is  an 
illuminating  experience  for  those  who 
seek  to  take  the  Incarnation  seriously, 
for  Pastor  Genzel  has  learned  to  be 
present  in  the  world,  to  listen,  and  feel 
and  respond.  Based  in  a parish,  he 
spends  most  nights  in  the  jazz  centers 
of  the  city,  not  preaching  or  talking 
religion  necessarily,  but  entering  into 
the  lives  of  jazz  musicians  and  learning 
to  know  them  as  fellow  human  beings, 
often  sensitive  and  alive.  From  them  he 
has  come  to  understand  freshly  and 
more  deeply  the  meaning  of  depersonali- 
zation in  modern  life,  about  the  struggle 
of  racial  minorities,  about  alienation  and 
estrangement  and  the  other  big  words 
clergy  too  easily  bandy  about.  They 
showed  him  what  is  really  happening 
in  the  hearts  and  minds  and  lives  of 
people  in  a big  city  in  the  middle  of  the 
twentieth  century.  In  listening  and 
learning  from  the  world,  he  was  driven 
back  to  the  Bible  with  new  urgency. 

To  live  by  the  Incarnation,  then,  is 
not  to  begin  with  a ready  made  answer 
for  the  world’s  problems,  but  so  to  live 
in  the  world  that  a genuine  dialogue 
takes  place  between  the  realities  of  the 
world  and  the  truth  of  the  gospel.  God’s 
word  comes  afresh  to  men  as  they  stand 
in  concrete  situations  in  the  world, 


44 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


placed  there  for  obedience,  and  not  in 
the  isolation  of  a religious  ghetto.  Chris- 
tian ethics  is  not  a system  to  be  applied 
like  a band-aid  to  the  world’s  problems, 
but  is  the  involvement  of  Christians  in 
the  world’s  problems,  in  the  midst  of 
which  they  express  Christ’s  love  and 
witness  to  the  hope  that  comes  from  the 
resurrection.  To  live  by  the  Incarnation 
is  to  believe  that  God  is  now  at  work 
in  the  world  and  we  are  called  to  dis- 
cern what  he  is  about,  to  see  the  world 
through  eyes  of  faith,  and  bring  into  its 
life  the  perspective  of  the  gospel. 

Illustrations  of  dialogue  with  the 
world  are  difficult  to  find,  for  as  Peter 
Berger  has  suggested,  there  is  no  con- 
frontation between  a secularized  church 
and  a pseudo-Christian  culture.  Dia- 
logue demands  that  Christian  laymen 
be  present  self-consciously  in  the  world 
where  they  work,  engage  in  politics, 
and  struggle  for  community.  Some  of 
the  critics  have  about  come  to  the  con- 
clusion that  present  forms  of  congrega- 
tional life  are  impossible  for  the  task  of 
Incarnation  and  radical  new  forms  must 
be  sought.  Clearly,  every  kind  of  ex- 
periment that  offers  hope  must  be  at- 
tempted, but  in  the  process,  the  local 
congregation  must  also  face  this  issue 
of  participation  in  the  world  and  not 
go  down  without  a fight.  The  congrega- 
tion of  Christ  Church,  Presbyterian,  in 
Burlington,  Vermont,  has  made  serious 
attempts  to  be  present  in  the  world  and 
enter  into  dialogue  through  The  Loft, 
a coffee-house  book  store,  located  in  the 
heart  of  the  business  district.  Where- 
ever  the  congregation  breaks  out  of  the 
narrow  sphere  of  “religious”  concerns 
and  enters  into  the  full  arena  of  human 
experience,  then  dialogue  may  begin, 
with  all  the  concomitant  results  that  oc- 
cur when  men  come  face  to  face  with 


the  gospel  at  the  heart  of  life,  and  not 
on  its  periphery. 

2.  Witness  to  the  Crucifixion:  In  the 
second  place,  the  path  of  witness  is  to 
enter  into  the  way  of  the  Cross.  We 
must  not  only  be  present  in  the  world, 
but  we  are  also  called  to  enter  into 
God’s  work.  Let  me  mention  here  the 
aspects  of  this  task  which  seem  most 
urgent  for  our  witness  today. 

(a)  We  join  Christ  at  work  in  the 
world.  Most  missionary  and  evangelis- 
tic literature  assumes  that  the  Christian 
is  called  to  take  Christ  to  the  world, 
to  introduce  him  as  some  kind  of 
stranger.  In  fact,  Christ  is  at  work  in 
the  world  and  we  simply  enter  into  his 
task  as  obedient  servants.  This  is  to 
take  up  our  cross  and  follow  him.  We 
are  sent  to  men  in  whom  Christ’s  spirit 
is  already  at  work,  and  in  whom  we 
literally  meet  Christ.  Surely,  if  we  wish 
to  encounter  Christ  we  will  find  him 
where  he  promised  to  be,  with  the  sick, 
the  prisoners,  the  hungry,  the  naked, 
. . . and  with  the  dehumanized  men  and 
women  of  urban  America  (Matthew 
25:31-46). 

It  is  hard  to  have  such  eyes  of  faith. 
Many  are  able  to  talk  about  the  fight 
for  justice  and  to  work  hard  for  im- 
portant causes.  Few  are  blessed  with 
the  gift  of  love  that  enables  them  to 
stand  with  the  unlovely  victims  of  in- 
justice and  individually  care  for  them. 
It  is  easier  to  fight  for  better  care  of 
addicts  than  to  love  an  addict,  for  when 
he  is  not  using  drugs,  he  is  likely  to  be 
unpleasant  and  unlovable  a human  be- 
ing as  one  can  imagine.  But  Christ,  in 
calling  us  into  his  ministry,  expects  us 
to  see  in  every  man  one  for  whom  he 
also  died,  and  grants  to  his  servants  the 
gift  of  love. 

(b)  We  are  called  to  meet  human 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


45 


need,  but  not  promiscuously.  Jesus,  in 
the  temple,  read  the  passage  which  de- 
fined his  ministry : 

‘‘He  has  sent  me  to  preach  good  news 
to  the  poor, 

proclaim  release  to  the  captives 
and  recovering  of  sight  to  the  blind, 
to  set  at  liberty  those  who  are  op- 
pressed, 

to  proclaim  the  acceptable  year  of 
the  Lord.” 

As  a congregation,  we  must  ask  our- 
selves what  it  is  we  are  called  to  do  to 
fulfill  this  ministry  of  healing  and  serv- 
ice. Set  down  in  the  midst  of  East  Har- 
lem, with  its  manifold  forms  of  human 
need,  what  was  a small  parish  called  to 
do?  So  easily  its  energy  might  be  dis- 
sipated and  its  function  destroyed  in  the 
genuine  effort  to  meet  more  problems 
than  it  had  the  strength  or  resources  to 
deal  with.  What  is  the  business  of  God’s 
people  as  a corporate  body?  Out  of  the 
experience  of  East  Harlem  I would  sug- 
gest that  at  least  the  following  elements 
are  part  of  the  answer : 

(i)  The  congregation  would  under- 
take those  tasks  which  enable  it  to  point 
to  the  reconciliation  and  the  love  which 
it  knows  in  Jesus  Christ,  in  other  words 
to  those  tasks  which  point  to  Jesus 
Christ.  In  specific  terms  this  means  that 
a congregation  seeks  out  the  problems 
of  human  life  that  are  presently  no- 
body’s concern : the  unvisited  in  prisons, 
the  sick  no  one  is  caring  for,  the  drug 
addict,  ignored  by  society  or  at  best 
treated  as  a criminal.  In  East  Harlem, 
the  need  of  the  drug  addict  pointed  to  a 
clear  place  for  the  congregation  to  work, 
for  in  seeking  to  offer  Christ’s  love  and 
healing,  in  whatever  partial  and  broken 
ways,  it  was  pointed  to  the  restoring, 
saving  power  of  God. 


As  a corollary  of  this  position,  when 
the  world  discovers  addiction  as  a prob- 
lem and  begins  to  face  the  problem,  it  is 
not  for  the  church  to  insist  that  it  de- 
velop further  its  programs  of  medical, 
legal,  psychiatric  and  casework  help,  but 
gladly  relinquish  much  of  its  work  to 
society.  Now,  by  its  work  with  addicts, 
it  no  longer  points  in  a unique  way  to 
Christ,  for  the  victims  of  injustice  have 
been  discovered  and  are  no  longer  help- 
less. 

(ii)  The  congregation  must  meet 
real  needs,  not  simply  those  that  are 
most  obvious.  In  East  Harlem,  the  im- 
mediate human  needs  are  so  great  and 
overwhelming,  the  temptation  is  always 
to  concentrate  on  food,  shelter,  employ- 
ment and  the  like,  without  remembering 
the  ultimate  needs  of  men  go  beyond 
these.  The  story  of  the  beggar,  asking 
Peter  for  alms,  is  a good  reminder  of 
our  need  to  give  what  we  have.  Peter 
recognized  the  man’s  deepest  need,  and 
that  he  could  meet  only  in  the  name  of 
Jesus  Christ.  Again,  in  the  story  from 
the  gospels  of  the  paralytic  man,  Jesus 
met  not  only  the  immediate  need  for 
healing  but  also  forgave  the  man  his 
sins.  These  aspects  of  human  life  are 
not  in  conflict,  but  the  congregation 
must  never  forget  that  the  ultimate  need 
of  men  is  for  forgiveness,  reconciliation, 
and  community.  The  congregation,  in 
facing  human  needs,  is  thus  called  not 
only  to  bring  compassion  that  encom- 
passes the  life  of  those  in  need,  but  also 
comprehends  the  full  dimensions  of 
their  need. 

(iii)  The  congregation  points  to 
Christ,  not  to  itself.  “For  what  we 
preach  is  not  ourselves,  but  Jesus  Christ 
as  Lord,  with  ourselves  as  your  serv- 
ants for  Jesus’  sake”  (2  Cor.  4:5).  So 
easily  the  Christian  points  to  his  own 


46 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


experience  rather  than  to  his  lord.  Or 
the  clergyman  becomes  the  center  for 
people  of  their  loyalty.  But  in  the  re- 
markable phrase  of  D.  T.  Niles,  “The 
Christian  is  one  beggar  telling  another 
beggar  where  to  find  food.”  Lose  for  a 
moment  that  stance  of  a beggar  and 
stand  over  the  other  in  some  other  re- 
lationship, then  we  shall  fail  to  follow 
the  way  of  the  Cross  and  live  by  Christ 
alone.  The  moment  we  stop  being  beg- 
gars in  attitude  and  feeling  we  begin  to 
live  by  works  and  not  by  faith. 

(c)  The  individual  Christian  is  always 
involved  in  witness.  The  congregation 
must  make  decisions  as  to  its  areas  of 
work  and  concern  in  witness  of  Christ. 
For  the  individual,  called  to  the  way  of 
the  Cross,  everything  he  does,  every- 
where he  goes  must  be  part  of  his  wit- 
ness. This  is  pretty  idealistic  talk,  as  we 
all  know,  for  the  laity  of  the  Church  de- 
fines Christian  service  by  what  they  do 
in  and  for  the  gathered  life  of  the 
Church.  But  what  sounds  idealistic  is 
in  fact  normative.  If  Christians  do  not 
live  in  their  dispersed  life  in  the  world 
as  witnesses,  the  Church  is  simply  not 
a church.  “The  church  exists  by  mis- 
sion as  a fire  exists  by  burning,”  to  use 
Dr.  Brunner’s  words.  Without  laymen 
engaged  in  full  time  obedience,  there  is 
no  mission. 

The  new  interest  in  small  groups  of 
various  kinds  in  the  congregation  are 
in  large  part  a reflection  of  the  need 
to  prepare  men  in  the  gathered  life  of 
the  church  for  their  work  in  the  world. 
While  the  locus  of  much  of  their  witness 
will  be  in  their  daily  work,  there  must 
also  be  conscious  involvement  in  com- 
munity organizations  and  politics.  In 
East  Harlem,  as  a symbol  of  church 
work  as  obedience  in  the  world,  we 
have  long  required  all  staff  and  mem- 


bers to  join  at  least  one  community  or- 
ganization, working  for  brotherhood  or 
justice.  God  is  at  work  in  such  places, 
and  we  must  join  him  there. 

(d)  The  congregation  in  its  service 
has  no  ulterior  motive.  Christ  healed 
men  because  they  were  sick.  He  did  not 
suggest  that  they  should  then  become 
his  followers.  For  the  Church,  this 
poses  a very  subtle  issue.  So  much  of 
what  we  do  as  one  eye  on  getting  new 
members  or  building  up  our  institution. 
This  is  always  wrong  as  any  part  of 
the  motivation  of  our  service.  But  at 
the  same  time,  we  pray  that  men  will 
come  to  know  the  truth  and  that  truth 
is  fully  known  through  life  in  the  body 
of  Christ.  Somehow  we  must  both  pray 
that  Christ  will  give  the  harvest,  that 
men  will  be  lead  into  his  Church,  and 
yet  in  no  way  ourselves  seek  to  force 
the  growth  or  reap  the  harvest  prema- 
turely. 

(e)  Finally,  in  entering  into  the  way 
of  the  Cross,  the  Christian  expects  suf- 
fering. The  reality  of  the  Crucifixion 
stands  as  the  power  of  man’s  rejection 
of  love.  The  congregation  today  must 
grasp  the  truth  that  when  men  confront 
the  gospel,  they  may  reject  it  or  try  vi- 
ciously to  destroy  it.  Or,  in  our  day,  they 
may  simply  disbelieve  that  it  is  true, 
since  signs  of  the  first  fruits  of  the  king- 
dom are  so  rare  in  the  Church.  When 
the  Christian  expects  suffering,  antago- 
nism, dislike,  frustration,  suspicion,  then 
he  is  prepared  for  the  warfare  against 
the  principalities  and  powers  to  which 
he  is  called,  and  surprised  by  the  joy 
which  God  often  gives  in  the  midst  of 
trouble. 

Perhaps  unbelief  in  the  claims  of 
Christianity  is  the  sharpest  rejection  in 
the  inner  city.  As  a white,  middle  class 
clergyman  in  East  Harlem,  I affirm  that 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


47 


I am  a brother  in  Christ  to  the  men  and 
women  of  the  community.  One  is  a 
Puerto  Rican  orderly  in  a large  hospi- 
tal, his  life  dominated  by  white  doctors 
and  nurses  who  in  most  cases  hardly  are 
aware  of  him  as  a person.  He  is  not 
likely  to  accept  my  statement  of  our 
brotherhood  at  face  value,  but  uncon- 
sciously, perhaps,  will  subject  me  to 
every  kind  of  testing,  figuring  that 
sooner  or  later  he  will  call  the  white 
man’s  blufif.  The  testing  is  a very  dis- 
concerting business,  for  I,  at  least,  am 
aware  of  the  feebleness  of  my  love  and 
concern  and  conscious  of  my  own  sin- 
fulness. So  it  is  hard  to  know  whether 
I am  being  “persecuted”  for  righteous- 
ness’ sake  or  for  my  sins  ! In  either  case, 
I must  learn  to  expect  that  the  way  of 
the  Cross  will  involve  testing  and  seek 
in  it  whatever  meaning  God  will  grant. 

Thus  the  way  of  the  Cross  is  fool- 
ishness to  the  world,  but  for  the  Chris- 
tians, the  power  of  God. 

3.  Witness  to  the  Resurrection : The 
Incarnation,  the  Crucifixion,  and  the 
Resurrection  are  part  of  the  one  reality 
of  Jesus  Christ  to  which  the  Christian 
is  called  to  witness.  As  we  enter  into 
Christ’s  work  now  in  the  world,  we  live 
by  hope.  Our  hope  is  defined  first  by 
the  reality  of  the  victory  that  has  been 
won  and  second  by  our  confidence  that 
Christ  will  come  again.  Service  that  is 
not  sustained  by  hope,  that  does  not 
point  to  Christ’s  victory,  is  not  Chris- 
tian service  at  all.  Christians  share  in 
the  first  fruits  of  the  kingdom.  Eschatol- 
ogy, then,  does  not  cut  across  social 
concern,  but  is  essential  to  it,  if  it  is  to 
be  part  of  Christian  witness. 

The  unreality  of  this  affirmation  for 
! most  American  Christians  is  obvious. 

! In  the  midst  of  East  Harlem,  I am  only 
dimly  beginning  to  glimpse  what  it  must 


mean  for  the  congregation.  But  clearly, 
there  is  no  other  way  to  continue  in  the 
face  of  failure,  discouragement,  and 
frustration  save  in  the  confidence  that 
the  victory,  in  spite  of  our  feeble  efforts 
is  secure,  and  that  Christ  is  Lord  in- 
deed. 

The  reality  of  the  Resurrection  must 
begin  to  find  expression  in  simply  pat- 
terns in  the  lives  of  Christians.  To  live 
with  joy  and  confidence  in  the  midst 
of  struggle  and  seeming  defeat— that 
would  point  to  the  Resurrection.  To 
keep  on  ministering  as  best  one  can  to 
drug  addicts,  even  when  no  names  are 
added  to  the  Church  rolls  and  only  a 
handful  are  in  any  sense  healed — that  is 
possible  only  in  the  confidence  that 
Christ  has  called  you  to  that  task,  and 
whether  you  succeed  or  fail,  the  issue 
is  in  his  hands. 

In  East  Harlem  we  have  found  that 
positive  content  can  come  through  “gos- 
siping the  gospel.”  If  the  Resurrection 
as  the  central  event  of  faith  is  at  all 
real  to  men  and  women,  then  natural- 
ly, spontaneously,  they  will  talk  about 
Christ.  This  will  not  be  a fundamen- 
talists intrusion  into  the  lives  of  oth- 
ers, but  the  reality  of  Christ  will  be 
such  a part  of  their  own  lives  that  they 
will,  whenever  an  occasion  offers,  easi- 
ly and  unselfconsciously  “gossip”  about 
what  has  happened  to  which  they  have 
now  become  witnesses.  A faith  that 
does  not  gossip  the  Gospel  must  be 
pretty  second-hand  and  unimportant  to 
the  one  who  affirms  it.  This  is  not  only 
a matter  of  talking,  of  course,  but  of 
the  orientation  of  the  Christian’s  whole 
life.  He  is  one  who  understands  that 
all  he  does  is  in  obedience  to  his  lord, 
and  thus  part  of  witness  and  service. 

Thus  in  this  first  section  of  the  dis- 
cussion of  witness  we  have  sought  to 


48 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


affirm  the  essential  unity  between  the 
dimensions  of  witness : participation  in 
the  Incarnation,  in  the  Crucifixion  and 
in  the  Resurrection.  Whenever  the 
Church  takes  one  of  these  as  its  basic 
focus  and  ignores  or  curtails  the  oth- 
ers, its  witness  is  partial  and  perhaps 
becomes  even  false.  For  then  the  con- 
gregation does  not  point  fully  to  Jesus 
Christ,  the  Lord  of  its  life.  Witness  is 
not  some  form  of  religious  propaganda, 
nor  is  it  the  propagation  or  establish- 
ment of  churches.  It  is  devoid  of  any 
kind  of  striving  for  demonstrable  suc- 
cess. Witness  is  so  to  live  and  work  and 
speak  among  men  that  you  know  noth- 
ing among  men  except  Jesus  Christ  and 
him  crucified. 

The  Possibility  of  Renewal 

The  topic  is  renewal  through  witness. 
Renewal  is  a possibility  when  the 
Church  has  been  opened  to  the  renew- 
ing power  of  the  Holy  Spirit.  It  is  my 
thesis  that  whenever  a congregation 
takes  seriously  the  dimensions  of  wit- 
ness we  have  described  in  the  first  part 
of  this  talk,  it  will  be  driven  to  repent- 
ance and  may  again  become  the  kind 
of  open  vessel  into  which  the  Holy  Spir- 
it may  pour  its  power.  The  chastening 
experience  of  the  East  Harlem  Protes- 
tant Parish  is  illustrative.  When  the 
Parish  got  started,  its  dynamic  founder, 
Don  Benedict,  was  certain  that  the  Gos- 
pel was  relevant  to  human  needs  and 
that  the  Christian  had  to  fight  for  jus- 
tice. He  went  into  East  Harlem,  all 
fists  flying,  to  solve  all  problems  and  to 
witness  in  every  way  possible.  The 
speeches  made  by  parish  clergy  in  the 
early  years  were  all  about  social  con- 
cern and  action.  But  gradually  the  par- 
ish, as  it  sought  to  serve  its  Lord  in  the 
world,  was  driven  back  to  ask  what  it 


means  to  be  witnesses.  Then,  at  last, 
the  congregation  as  the  basis  of  mission 
became  apparent.  Then  the  great  Refor- 
mation concern  with  the  Church  became 
urgent  and  renewal  a necessity. 

1.  Renewal  through  the  Word:  As 
the  congregations  in  East  Harlem 
sought  to  live  in  their  world,  to  take 
seriously  the  Incarnation,  they  quickly 
discovered  how  little  they  knew  about 
what  God  had  done,  was  doing,  and 
had  promised  to  do  in  a short  time,  they 
were  sent  back  to  Bible  study  as  a basic 
task  of  Christians.  The  Bible,  as  far 
as  the  clergy  were  concerned,  could  no 
longer  be  a source  from  which  to  dredge 
sermons  or  a devotional  book,  but  now 
was  the  place  one  turned  to  understand 
East  Harlem  in  the  confidence  that  God 
“has  made  known  to  us  in  all  wisdom 
and  insight  the  mystery  of  his  will” 
(Ephesians  1:9).  The  congregation  be- 
comes the  locus  of  a dialogue  between 
the  world  in  which  it  is  seeking  to  live 
by  the  Incarnation  and  the  Word  of 
God  in  which  God  speaks  with  fresh 
power  to  his  people.  In  our  parish, 
Wednesday  night  Bible  study  has  be- 
come almost  as  much  a part  of  the  pat- 
tern of  congregational  participation  as 
Sunday  morning  worship,  though  this 
has  come  only  after  a long  struggle.  One 
of  the  clergy  of  the  parish,  after  six 
years  in  East  Harlem,  used  a sabbatical 
leave  of  five  months  to  study  Greek  as 
a vital  preparation  for  his  continuing 
ministry  in  the  inner  city.  A congrega- 
tion engaged  in  witness  will  be  led  to 
drench  itself  in  scripture  so  that  God’s 
Word  may  become  a living  sword  in  its 
hand.  Whenever  men  turn  with  eager- 
ness and  expectancy  to  scripture,  there 
is  hope  of  renewal. 

2.  Renewal  through  the  Sacraments : 
When  a congregation  seeks  to  take  the 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


49 


way  of  the  Cross  as  its  pattern  of  obedi- 
ence, it  finds  itself  driven  to  a new 
seriousness  in  Baptism  and  especially  in 
Holy  Communion.  In  East  Harlem,  the 
parish  early  discovered  that  its  ministry 
of  service  was  getting  nowhere,  for  the 
Christian  community  is  an  essential 
foundation.  Only  as  the  parish  became 
truly  a family  of  God,  in  its  own  life 
demonstrating  reconciliation,  accept- 
ance, and  love,  would  its  service  be 
faithful  and  point  to  its  Lord.  Above  all, 
when  men  seek  to  serve  Christ,  they 
are  led  back  regularly  to  the  place 
where  he  promises  to  meet  them,  at  his 
table.  There  they  are  fed,  sustained  and 
renewed  for  the  sake  of  their  witness. 
In  East  Harlem,  as  we  have  struggled 
to  hear  the  Word  again,  so  also  we  have 
sought  to  discover  what  it  means  to  be 
a family  of  God’s  people  who  gather 
regularly  at  his  table  to  re-enact  the 
meaning  of  our  faith  and  to  meet  our 
Lord.  In  our  situation  we  have  tried  in 
the  actions  of  communion  itself  to  make 
clear  that  we  are  a family : we  gather 
around  the  table  in  large  circles,  use 
the  ordinary  bread  of  the  community, 
pass  the  elements  from  hand  to  hand, 
eat  and  drink  together.  Whenever  men 
turn  with  eagerness  and  expectancy  to 
the  table,  there  is  hope  of  renewal. 

3.  Renewal  through  Discipline : 
When  men  and  women  seek  to  witness 
to  the  Resurrection,  they  discover  their 
urgent  need  for  a new  style  of  life,  for 
the  disciplines  and  habits  that  reflect 
their  participation  in  the  Kingdom  of 
their  Lord  that  already  has  begun.  Word 
and  Sacrament  are  essential,  but  so  also 
is  discipline  in  the  new  life  which  we 
enter  at  our  Baptism.  Geddes  MacGre- 
gor in  his  excellent  book  on  the  Church 
makes  the  point  that  for  the  Scottish 
church,  these  three  were  always  kept 


together  in  your  tradition.  In  East  Har- 
lem, the  clergy  have  struggled  with  a 
common  discipline  of  life.  The  parish 
as  a whole  is  seeking  to  discover  a style 
that  reflects  its  obedience  to  a new  Lord 
and  its  involvement  in  a new  task.  Dur- 
ing Lent  each  year  this  is  the  focus  of 
Bible  study,  but  it  is  a continual  con- 
cern. As  men  and  women  are  taught 
patterns  of  life  that  are  necessary  for  the 
Christian — prayer,  Bible  study,  wor- 
ship, service  and  the  rest — they  become 
open  to  the  channels  of  grace.  Disci- 
pline can  easily  become  legalistic  and 
rigid,  but  these  dangers  must  be  run, 
not  because  discipline  guarantees  re- 
newal, but  because  the  habits  of  the 
Christian  life  help  keep  men  open  to 
the  possibility  of  renewal. 

In  no  way  am  I seeking  in  this  sec- 
tion to  affirm  that  renewal  has  taken 
place  in  East  Harlem,  but  only  to  affirm 
that  as  a Parish  we  set  out  to  witness 
in  every  possible  way,  through  Incarna- 
tion, Crucifixion  and  Resurrection,  and 
in  the  process  have  been  driven  back 
to  the  Bible,  to  the  table,  and  to  a new 
concern  for  the  habits  of  the  Christian 
life.  Only  in  this  direction  does  the  hope 
of  renewal  lie. 

Implications  for  Present  Patterns 
of  Witness 

The  content  of  this  talk  has  certain 
implications  for  the  present  meaning  of 
witness  in  the  life  of  the  congregations 
in  this  country.  I have  purposely  left 
this  negative  section  until  last,  for  I 
hope  that  you  will  be  willing  yourselves 
to  draw  the  necessary  conclusions.  Let 
me  simply  point  the  way  as  I see  it.  My 
criticism  is  directed  to  the  practices 
that  we  have  come  to  take  for  granted, 
continue  to  carry  on  year  after  year, 
when  they  have  no  basis  in  our  theol- 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


So 

ogy  and  may  in  fact  contradict  it.  Re- 
cently I have  been  reading  evangelism 
materials  from  various  denominations. 
Some  of  the  best  of  them  have  devel- 
oped excellent  theological  statements  on 
the  meaning  of  evangelism,  but  usually 
the  methods  section  that  follows  has  no 
relationship  to  the  theology  at  all. 

1.  The  congregation  must  demon- 
strate the  Gospel : Here  men  must  ex- 
perience a foretaste  of  the  Kingdom  of 
God,  discover  the  unity  that  can  in  fact 
unite  all  sorts  of  conditions  of  men, 
albeit  in  partial  and  broken  ways,  and 
know  the  joy  of  life  together.  At  this 
point,  we  are  all  vulnerable.  The  de- 
scription of  a normative  Christian  com- 
munity sounds  idealistic  and  impossible, 
far  removed  from  the  homogeneous, 
secularized  congregations  we  know. 
When  I heard  D.  T.  Niles  suggest 
that  when  a stranger  enters  a church 
on  Sunday,  he  should  encounter  a 
reality  of  faith  that  he  will  recognize. 
The  Church  must  be  the  Church,  a 
foretaste  of  the  Kingdom,  a living  cell 
in  the  Body  of  Christ.  Without  a per- 
vasive awareness  of  its  dependence  upon 
its  Lord  and  continual  relationship  to 
him,  the  witness  of  the  congregation  is 
dead. 

2.  The  importance  of  conversion : 
We  witness  that  men  might  believe. 
In  Acts,  the  process  of  conversion  is 
defined  in  what  may  be  a normative  se- 
quence. Upon  hearing  Peter  preach,  the 
listeners  were  cut  to  the  heart,  repented, 
were  baptized  for  the  forgiveness  of 
their  sins,  and  were  given  the  gift  of 
the  Holy  Spirit.  When  I joined  the 
Church,  twenty  junior  high  children 
were  lined  up,  all  agreed  to  “live  a 
Christ-like  life”  and  joined  the  Church. 
A long  time  ago,  H.  Richard  Niebuhr 
wrote : 


“As  the  kingdom  of  Christ  is  institu- 
tionalized in  church  and  state  the  ways 
of  entering  it  are  also  defined,  mapped, 
motorized  and  equipped  with  guard 
rails.  Regeneration,  the  dying  to  the 
self  and  the  rising  to  new  life — now  ap- 
parently sudden,  now  so  slow  and  pain- 
ful, so  confused,  so  real,  so  mixed— 
becomes  conversion  which  takes  place 
on  Sunday  morning  during  the  singing 
of  the  last  hymn  or  twice  a year  when 
the  revival  preacher  comes  to  town.” 

In  whatever  way  you  would  define 
genuine  conversion  and  commitment  to 
Christ,  you  must  take  the  matter  with 
utter  seriousness  and  not  permit  church 
membership  in  our  day  to  be  superficial 
and  innocuous.  Perhaps  the  story  of  the 
encounter  between  Jesus  and  the  rich 
young  ruler  needs  to  be  deeply  pon- 
dered. 

3.  Christ  Converts:  In  our  task 
of  witnessing,  it  is  almost  impossible 
not  to  be  falsely  concerned  with  the 
results.  In  a variety  of  subtle  ways  we 
short-circuit  the  initiative  of  God  and 
lead  men  to  respond  to  human  agencies 
and  not  to  Christ.  The  danger  is  all  the 
great  in  an  age  of  institutions  where  the 
Church  seeks  in  its  own  life  to  copy  the 
patterns  of  a successful  human  institu- 
tion. Congregations  want  to  succeed  and 
in  the  process  lose  sight  of  the  function 
of  the  Church  and  betray  the  task  of 
evangelism.  Every  time  you  hear  a 
phrase  like  “Win  souls  for  Christ,”  I 
hope  you  will  stop  and  examine  the 
process  that  is  being  used.  Does  Christ 
do  the  winning,  or  the  cleverness  and 
wisdom  of  men?  Indeed  95  per  cent  of 
the  time  we  hear  the  phrase,  it  does  re- 
veal upon  examination  some  form  of 
human  manipulation  that  compromises 
in  the  end,  true  conversion.  As  a mat- 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


5i 


ter  of  fact,  I don’t  believe  the  phrase 
“winning  souls”  appears  in  the  Bible. 

In  the  inner  city  we  tend  to  talk 
about  “winning  the  city  for  Christ.” 
Again,  the  danger  is  the  same.  Men  pre- 
sume to  achieve  what  Christ  has  done 
and  is  doing.  The  moment  we  feel  that 
the  result  depends  upon  us,  we  have 
slipped  into  an  unbiblical  mode  of  think- 
ing. We  enter  into  Christ’s  task.  He  has 
the  initiative.  We  must  witness,  what- 
ever the  results,  whatever  the  soil  where 
he  places  us.  But  we  dare  not  force 
the  growth,  nor  harvest  before  Christ 
brings  it  to  maturity.  Deeply  praying 
that  men  may  respond  to  Christ,  that 
through  our  witness  they  may  become 
part  of  his  body,  we  yet  dare  not  this 
concern  the  motive  for  our  obedience, 
nor  let  it  absorb  our  attention. 

4.  The  congregation  exists  to  wit- 
ness : As  we  hold  before  ourselves  the 
essential  function  of  the  Church,  we 
have  a standard  by  which  to  judge  the 
program  and  activities  in  which  we  en- 
gage. As  Barth  has  said,  “As  an  apos- 
tolic church  the  Church  can  never  in 
any  respect  be  an  end  in  itself ; but,  fol- 
lowing the  existence  of  the  apostles,  it 
exists  only  as  it  exercises  the  ministry 
of  a witness.”  The  danger  arises  when 
we  invite  men  to  join  an  organization 
that  exists  to  serve  them,  to  meet 


their  spiritual  needs,  to  teach  their  chil- 
dren religious  values  and  all  the  other 
reasons  listed  in  visitation  evangelism 
manuals.  When  we  get  men  into  Church 
under  false  pretenses  (new  church  de- 
velopment books  are  full  of  such),  we 
are  not  likely  to  succeed  in  enlisting 
them  in  the  true  work  of  Christ. 

Enough  has  been  said  by  Winter, 
Berger,  Marty  and  the  other  “ok”  crit- 
ics about  the  introversion  and  institu- 
tional egocentrism  of  American  congre- 
gations. To  break  out  of  our  present 
predicament  will  be  impossible  save  by 
the  miracle  of  God’s  renewing  power. 
But  we  may  begin  by  holding  firmly  be- 
fore ourselves  the  truth  about  our  pur- 
pose. As  Jesus  instructed  the  first  apos- 
tles, so  we  are  to  go  forth  and  make  dis- 
ciples of  all  nations.  These  are  not 
“church  members,”  but  fellow  disciples, 
men  and  women  who  enter  the  life  of 
the  congregation  not  because  it  is  good 
for  them,  or  will  help  them,  or  is  right, 
or  is  important  to  their  spiritual  life, 
but  that  they  might  serve  their  lord  as 
witnesses  to  his  life  and  death  and  re- 
surrection. In  this  sense,  witness,  the 
kind  of  witness  we  have  been  talking 
about  does  not  lead  to  renewal  of  the 
Church.  It  is  the  Church,  truly  alive  as 
God’s  people  in  the  world. 


TILLICH’S  SCIENCE  OF  BEING 

William  Hallock  Johnson 


Two  generations  ago,  William  E. 

Gladstone,  British  statesman  and 
Prime  Minister,  in  the  Nineteenth  Cen- 
tury (1888),  reviewed  a famous  novel 
by  Mrs.  Humphrey  Ward  entitled  Rob- 
ert Elsmer.  Mrs.  Ward  for  conscien- 
tious reasons  had  abandoned  her  tradi- 
tional faith  in  the  Trinity  and  in  the 
Divinity  of  Christ  and  had  traced  a 
similar  change  of  belief  in  the  hero  of 
her  novel.  She  and  her  spokesman 
seemed  happier  in  a fervent  belief  in 
a bare  monotheism  expressed  in  lives 
of  devotion  to  the  Christian  virtues  and 
in  notable  service  among  the  people. 

Gladstone’s  review  was  reprinted  in 
Later  Gleanings  ( Scribner’s,  New  York, 
1897),  and  its  closing  sentence  read : “If 
the  ancient  and  continuous  creed  of 
Christendom  has  slipped  away  from  its 
place  in  Mrs.  Ward’s  brilliant  and  sub- 
tle understanding,  it  has  nevertheless 
by  no  means  lost  a true,  if  unacknowl- 
edged, hold  upon  the  inner  sanctuary 
of  her  heart.” 

For  some  time  past  theological  in- 
terest has  centered  in  the  work  of  two 
“offbeat”  theologians  who  have  wan- 
dered from  the  path  of  traditional  or- 
thodoxy. They  are  Rudolf  Bultmann  of 
Germany  and  Paul  Tillich  of  America. 
Both  have  a divided  allegiance  to  the 
new  philosophy  of  existentialism  on 
the  one  hand  and  to  the  teaching  of  the 
Old  and  New  Testaments  on  the  other. 
Our  topic  is  the  ontology  of  Tillich, 
with  only  a brief  glance  at  Bultmann. 
Our  main  sources  are  his  two  volumes 
on  Systematic  Theology,  Vol.  I,  1951, 
and  Vol.  II,  1957;  also  Biblical  Re- 


ligion and  the  Search  for  Ultimate 
Reality,  1955  (University  of  Chicago 
Press) . Two  volumes  of  sermons  should 
also  be  consulted : The  Shaking  of  the 
Foundations,  1948,  and  The  New  Be- 
ing, 1955  (both  by  Scribner’s,  New 
York).  It  will  be  convenient  to  con- 
fine ourselves  to  a few  leading  topics 
without  going  into  the  details  of  Til- 
lich’s wide  ranging  discussion. 

Tillich  and  Creation 

Tillich  fully  recognizes  the  value  of 
the  Biblical  and  traditional  doctrine  of 
Creation.  In  what  he  says  about  crea- 
tion we  hear  the  voice  of  traditional  or- 
thodoxy strongly  expressed.  He  says 
that  according  to  every  word  of  the 
Bible,  “God  reveals  himself  as  personal” 
{Biblical  Religion,  etc.,  p.  22.  All  quota- 
tions in  this  section  are  taken  from  this 
book).  The  doctrines  of  Christ,  of  salva- 
tion and  fulfilment  depend  on  this  doc- 
trine. It  emphasizes  the  dependence  of 
all  creation  on  God  and  the  essential 
goodness  of  creation.  It  protects  against 
the  two  gods,  good  and  evil  of  dualism, 
and  the  idealistic  merging  of  God  and 
man  into  monism.  “It  emphasizes  the 
infinite  distance  between  the  creator  and 
the  creature”  (p.  36).  It  was  correct 
and  proper  “for  Jews  and  Christians  to 
speak  of  creation  out  of  nothing.  Crea- 
tion through  the  word  means  the  per- 
sonality of  God”  (pp.  35,  36).  Biblical 
religion  in  the  Old  and  New  Testaments 
is  a religion  of  personalities.  The  climax 
of  the  argument  for  the  personality  of 
God  as  the  ultimate  reality  is  in  the  doc- 
trine of  Incarnation.  The  full  and  final 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


53 


revelation  of  God : “God  is  so  personal 
that  we  can  see  what  he  is  only  in  a per- 
sonal life”  (p.  38).  It  leaves  God  in  his 
majesty,  his  power,  in  his  sharp  and 
clear-cut  difference  from  all  his  crea- 
tures. This  sharp  difference  protects 
monotheism  from  polytheism  and  pan- 
theism. It  emphasizes  the  dependence 
on  God  of  everything  created  and,  con- 
sequently, the  essential  goodness  of  crea- 
tion (p.  35).  Of  this  doctrine  he  says, 
“Without  it,  Christianity  would  have 
ceased  to  exist  as  an  independent  move- 
ment” (p.  35). 

Tillich’s  praise  of  the  Biblical  ontol- 
ogy of  Genesis  could  not  be  stronger 
or  more  admirably  expressed,  and  it 
seems,  to  quote  Dr.  Patton,  [to  be] 
“shot  from  the  tense  bow-string  of  con- 
viction.” We  are  astonished,  then,  to 
hear  a new  and  authoritative  voice  from 
the  stage,  the  voice  of  Philosophy.  It  is 
so  directly  opposed  to  the  eloquent  plea 
for  the  Biblical  ontology  that  wonder : 
Can  it  be  by  the  same  man?  The  new 
voice  of  an  impersonal  ontology  breaks 
in  without  ceremony  and  says  of  ontol- 
ogy: “It  speaks  of  being — itself  as  the 
ground  of  everything  that  is,  personal 
and  impersonal.  It  speaks  of  the  identity 
of  the  infinite  with  the  finite.  It  speaks 
of  the  finite  mind  through  which  the 
Absolute  Mind  wills  and  recognizes 
himself”  (p.  36).  The  two  ontologies, 
Biblical  and  philosophical,  run  parallel 
but  never  meet.  But  it  will  be  Tillich’s 
declared  task  to  show  their  “profound 
interdependence”  (p.  42). 

It  is  unfortunate,  the  critic  could  re- 
mark, that  the  “Absolute  Mind”  when 
it  planned  and  carried  out  the  stupen- 
dous enterprise  of  Creation,  was  de- 
prived of  the  advice  and  consent  of  a 
senate  of  finite  spirits  because  no  finite 
spirits  yet  existed. 


Under  this  new  system,  Tillich  ac- 
knowledges, the  way  is  open  for  the  du- 
alism and  monism  from  which  the  Bib- 
lical ontology  gave  protection.  Two 
morals  may  now  be  safely  drawn : first, 
that  with  his  bitter  hostility  to  the  su- 
pernatural he  can  admit  no  real  doc- 
trine of  Creation ; and  second,  that  there 
are  two  Tillichs,  two  souls  within  a sin- 
gle breast,  or  one  and  the  same  great 
scholar  suffering  from  a type  of  schizo- 
phrenia in  the  broadest  sense,  attached 
with  almost  equal  fervor  and  equal  con- 
scientiousness to  two  incompatible  and 
mutually  exclusive  ontologies,  one  lead- 
ing to  an  abstract  and  impersonal  and 
speechless  and  loveless  Being,  and  the 
other  who  created  the  world  by  his 
word  and  out  of  nothing  in  the  effort- 
lessness of  his  omnipotence. 

The  early  Greek  thinkers  and  the 
philosophers  from  Plato  and  Aristotle 
down  have  been  seeking  for  Ultimate 
Reality.  As  philosophers  they  cannot 
and  will  not  appeal  to  revelation,  al- 
though Plato  in  the  Phaedo  reports  that 
Socrates  advises  Simmias  and  Cebes 
to  take  the  best  of  human  opinions  and 
thus  sail,  not  without  risk,  over  the  sea 
of  life,  unless  we  have  some  divine  word. 
People  in  university  circles  have  all 
known  devout  philosophers  and  scien- 
tists but  have  never  heard  them  sing, 
in  passionate  praise  to  Being  itself.  Why 
should  they?  First,  because  Being  is  an 
abstraction  from  the  innumerable  be- 
ings in  the  world  and  is  itself  on  the 
side  of  the  finite  and  cannot  reach  the 
ultimate,  and  the  philosophers  who  do 
their  best  work  in  moments  of  detach- 
ment and  reflection  regard  passions 
and  emotion  as  obstacles  to  clarity  of 
thought.  What  can  Tillich  do  in  the 
circumstances?  Fortunately  he  has  dis- 
covered a short  cut  to  Ultimate  Reality, 


54 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


and  uses  it  constantly  and  skillfully  in 
his  argument.  An  ultimate  concern  in 
the  key  to  Ultimate  Reality.  There  is 
no  doubt  of  its  utility  as  pointing  to  the 
truth  but  much  as  to  its  infallibility.  The 
concern  must  be  passionate  and  uncon- 
ditional, a matter  of  life  and  death.  It 
must  grasp  us  or  be  grasped  by  us  with 
our  whole  being,  not  by  reason  alone. 
Tillich  thinks  that  there  may  be  such 
concern  for  being-itself  as  the  psalmist 
had  when  he  exclaimed,  “My  soul  is 
athirst  for  God,  for  the  living  God” 
(Ps.  42:2).  I believe  it  is  plain  that  if 
God  is  the  Creator  of  all  things,  visible 
and  invisible,  that  being-itself,  abstract- 
ed by  the  human  mind  from  finite  things, 
must  fall  on  the  finite  side  and  further 
is  so  uncertain  in  meaning  and  closely 
allied,  as  we  shall  see,  with  Nothingness 
that  it  cannot  be  a matter  of  life  and 
death.  Ultimate  Concern  is  too  enig- 
matic, too  subjective,  too  changeable 
from  group  to  group  and  from  one  pe- 
riod in  an  individual  life  to  another  to 
reach  as  high  as  heaven  or  as  deep  as 
the  Everlasting  Arms. 

Examples  easily  suggest  themselves. 
Thus  C.  S.  Lewis,  in  his  book,  Mir- 
acles, 1947,  says  that  he  was  at  first 
an  atheist  with  a “passionate  convic- 
tion” that  miracles  never  happened,  but 
then  he  became  a Christian  with  an 
equally  passionate  conviction  that  the 
Gospel  miracles  are  historical.  Similar- 
ly Reinhold  Niebuhr  in  his  Beyond 
Tragedy,  1937  (pp.  289,  290),  speaks 
of  his  radical  change  of  view  on  the 
Resurrection  since  twenty  years  ago. 
Muslims  have  as  much  concern  for  their 
creed  as  Christians,  and  many  observers 
say  that  the  Communists  have  more. 
Tillich’s  radical  change  in  the  matter  of 
the  Fall  (see  next  section)  may  be  a 


case  in  point.  It  is  possible  that  Tillich’s 
short  cut  to  Ultimate  Reality  may  be 
like  the  by-way  into  which  the  Pil- 
grim was  led  and  which  ended  up  with 
Doubting  Castle  and  Giant  Despair. 

Tillich  and  the  Fall 

In  the  philosophical  situation  today 
what  stands  out  with  most  startling  em- 
phasis is  the  fact  that  the  new  school 
of  Existentialism  has  given  powerful 
support  to  the  Biblical  doctrine  of  the 
Fall.  Existentialism,  as  Tillich  has  right- 
ly said,  is  a description  of  the  human 
predicament.  The  result  is  that  the  writ- 
ings of  the  living  existentialists  with- 
out exception  are  dotted  with  such  terms 
as  estrangement,  anguish,  anxiety,  care, 
dread  of  death  or  nothingness  and  guilt. 
Meaninglessness  is  bad  enough,  but  it 
is  the  least  of  our  troubles.  What  are  all 
of  these  dreadful  terms  but  a modern 
translation  of  the  old-fashioned  “estate 
of  sin  and  misery”  into  which  men  have 
fallen  ? 

Tillich  has  felt  the  trend,  and  with 
admirable  candor,  insight,  and  common 
sense,  has  confessed  in  a later  publica- 
tion, Love,  Power,  and  Justice  (Ox- 
ford University  Press,  New  York,  i960, 
p.  25),  that  “estrangement  presupposes 
oneness.”  More  explicitly  a year  earlier 
in  his  Theology  of  Culture,  he  says: 
“In  the  Christian  tradition,  there  are 
three  fundamental  concepts.  First,  Esse 
que  esse  bonum  est.  This  Latin  phrase 
is  a basic  dogma  of  Christianity.  It 
means  ‘Being  as  being  is  good.’  Or  in 
the  biblical  mythological  form : God 
saw  everything  that  he  had  created,  and 
behold,  it  was  good.  The  second  state- 
ment is  the  universal  fall — fall  meaning 
the  transition  from  this  essential  good- 
ness into  existential  estrangement  from 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


55 


oneself,  which  happens  in  every  living 
being  and  in  every  time.  The  third  state- 
ment refers  to  the  possibility  of  salva- 
tion. . . . These  three  considerations  of 
human  nature  are  present  in  all  genuine 
theological  thinking : essential  goodness, 
existential  estrangement,  and  the  pos- 
sibility of  something,  a ‘third,’  beyond 
essence  and  existence,  through  which 
the  cleavage  is  overcome  and  healed” 
(pp.  1 1 8,  1 19).  These  three  stages  in 
an  authentic  theology  are  evidently  suc- 
cessive. Tillich’s  present  testimony  is 
more  effective  because  in  his  two  volume 
Systematic  Theology  he  held  firmly  the 
view  that  Creation  and  the  Fall  were  si- 
multaneous. He  formerly  thought  that 
we  were  compelled  to  believe  that  crea- 
tion and  the  fall  are  coincident.  “Crea- 
turely  freedom  is  the  point  at  which 
Creation  and  the  Fall  coincide”  ( S.T . 
I.,  p.  256).  “There  is  no  point  in  time 
and  space  in  which  created  goodness 
was  actualized  and  had  existence.” 
There  is  no  utopia  in  the  past  and  will 
be  none  in  the  future.  “Creation  and 
estrangement  are  identical”  (S.T.  II, 
p.  44).  There  is  no  need  to  discuss  the 
point  for  in  later  publications  Tillich 
gives  it  up  and  shows  that  he  cannot 
continue  to  believe  that  a loving  God 
would  create  man  in  estrangement,  if 
not  in  hostility  to  himself.  It  is  plain 
that  Tillich  cannot  continue  to  believe 
it. 

In  Tillich’s  present  view  of  the  Fall 
it  is  an  historic  event  and  there  was  a 
time  in  the  history  of  humanity,  before 
sin  by  man  had  entered  into  the  world 
(Rom.  5:12)  when  the  way  is  opened 
to  believe  that  in  history  at  its  end 
“Christ  will  appear  a second  time,  not 
to  deal  with  sin  but  to  save  those  who 
are  eagerly  waiting  for  him”  (Heb. 
9:28). 


Tillich’s  Being  and  Nothingness 

The  topic  of  the  relation  of  Being  to 
non-being  or  Nothingness  has  assumed 
major  importance  in  recent  years.  The 
shadow  has  become  of  greater  impor- 
tance than  the  sun  which  casts  the  shad- 
ow, as  in  the  story  of  the  man  who 
made,  he  thought,  a shrewd  bargain 
with  the  devil  on  the  promise  of  great 
wealth  and  the  gift  in  return  of  his 
worthless  shadow — and  his  soul.  When 
the  boys  jeered  after  him  on  the  sunny 
street,  and  people  avoided  him  as  a 
sinister  figure  and  his  fiancee  broke  her 
engagement,  he  discovered  that  with  his 
shadow  he  had  thrown  away  all  hope 
of  happiness  in  life. 

The  story  would  have  no  point  were 
it  not  for  the  paradox  that  what  has  no 
value  or  even  existence  has  usurped 
the  leading  role  in  philosophical  drama 
which  might  well  be  called  with  Shake- 
speare “much  ado  about  nothing,”  but 
has  been  named  in  euphemism  “existen- 
tialism.” When  the  critic  wants  to  be 
sure  of  a laugh  he  will  parody  the  fa- 
miliar hymn  and  sing:  “How  sweet  the 
name  of  Being  sounds  in  a believer’s 
ear.” 

Tillich’s  name  is  often  associated  with 
that  of  Bultmann.  Both  are  called  exis- 
tentialists, and  they  do  not,  to  my  knowl- 
edge, disown  the  soft  impeachment.  To 
be  an  existentialist  is  no  reproach  or 
advantage  to  a theologian,  since  this 
school  of  thought  is  completely  neutral 
in  religious  faith.  A glance  at  Pascal 
and  Nietzsche,  both  called  precursors 
and  morning  stars  of  existentialism, 
will  show  the  extremes  which  may  be 
found  in  religious  attitudes.  Thus  Pas- 
cal says:  “Jesus  Christ  is  the  Center 
of  everything  and  the  object  of  every- 
thing; and  he  who  does  not  know  him 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


56 

knows  nothing  of  the  order  of  the  world, 
and  nothing  of  himself.” 

Nietzsche  says  repeatedly  that  “God 
is  dead.”  Karl  Jaspers,  in  his  definitive 
biography  of  Nietzsche,  (translated  into 
French,  but  not  into  English)  declares 
that  in  this  saying  the  philosopher  did 
not  make  himself  an  atheist  but  aimed 
to  clear  the  road  for  a “higher  region” 
beyond  good  and  evil.  Jaspers  believed 
that  Nietzsche  with  this  power  could 
elevate  the  race  by  “severity,  violence, 
slavery,  tempter’s  art  and  deviltry  of 
every  kind — by  everything  wicked,  ter- 
rible, tyrannical,  predatory,  and  serpen- 
tine in  man”  ( Beyond  Good  and  Evil, 
Aph.  44).  The  title  of  the  work  from 
which  this  quotation  is  drawn  is  sig- 
nificant. 

Kierkegaard,  the  founder  of  existen- 
tialism, was  a Lutheran  and  Marcel  is 
a Roman  Catholic.  Both  would  vote  for 
the  Ten  Commandments,  of  which  the 
sixth  protects  my  life,  the  seventh  my 
wife  and  family,  the  eighth  my  proper- 
ty, and  the  ninth  my  good  name.  Tillich 
is  strong  on  the  ethical  emphasis  in 
both  testaments.  “Biblical  ethics  means 
standing  in  ultimate  decision  for  or 
against  God”  ( Biblical  Religion,  p.  46). 

The  being  of  God  is  the  central  prob- 
lem of  Tillich’s  Systematic  Theology, 
I & II.  Kierkegaard,  deadly  enemy  of 
Hegel,  had  an  implicit  ontology  when 
he  spoke  of  the  infinite  qualitative  dis- 
tinction of  God  from  all  other  beings. 
Tillich  in  his  ontological  argument  uses 
constantly  the  term  “being-itself,”  and 
very  often  “the  power  of  being.”  Being 
is  a broader  term  than  God.  It  does  not 
distinguish  but  includes  two  kinds  of  be- 
ings, finite  being — an  abstraction  from 
the  multiplicity  of  beings — and  an  eter- 
nal, self-existent  living  God  and  Crea- 
tor. The  “power  of  being”  thus  is  am- 


biguous. It  can  mean  the  power  of  God 
or  a powerless  abstraction  from  finite  be- 
ings— impersonal,  speechless  and  love- 
less. “God  is  love”  is  not  derived  from 
psychoanalysis  or  from  dissection  of 
Dasein,  but  from  revelation  of  God  in 
Jesus  Christ. 

Tillich  sees  a tree  in  his  back  yard 
and  says  that  it  “exists  only  because  it 
participates  in  that  power  of  being 
which  is  treehood”  (S.T.  II,  p.  11). 
But  can  the  putting  on  of  the  ‘hood,’ 
treehood,  ever  make  a tree?  I see  from 
my  window  an  enormous  spruce  tree 
towering  over  its  neighbors  and  carry- 
ing up  with  it  a tremendous  weight  of 
trunk  and  branches  against  the  down- 
ward pull  of  gravitation.  As  I gaze  on 
my  tree  I can  only  say  with  the  poet 
in  profound  and  reverent  conviction, 
“Only  God  can  make  a tree.”  We  must 
be  careful  and  not  go  back  to  the  pre- 
Baconian  age  of  science  and  change  the 
nature  of  a thing  into  its  efficient  cause. 

Tillich  is  still  hopeful  of  the  effort 
to  assimilate  the  apostolic  tradition  and 
the  modern  mind.  Others — Schleierma- 
cher,  Hegel  and  modern  liberals — have 
failed.  But,  he  says,  “There  is  no  choice 
for  us.  We  must  try  again”  ( Biblical 
Religion,  etc.,  p.  57).  In  every  period 
that  we  know,  and  worse  times  are  pre- 
dicted for  the  future,  the  modern  mind 
is  too  frivolous,  too  self-centered,  too 
much  a lover  of  self,  lover  of  pleasure 
and  of  money,  and  too  little  a lover  of 
God  to  make  this  possible.  “If  any  one 
loves  the  world,  love  for  the  Father  is 
not  in  him”  (I  John  2:15).  His  view 
of  the  polarity  of  faith  and  doubt  makes 
him  bring  together  things  that  are  poles 
apart,  makes  him  mix  oil  and  water. 
He  is  following  here  the  dictum  of  a 
great  revolutionist,  Lenin,  whose  col- 
lected works  show  that  he  is  no  mean 


57 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


controversalist.  The  principle  is  that 
dialectics  is  the  unity  of  opposites. 

We  are  reminded  of  Shelling’s  Sys- 
tem of  Identity : Object  and  subject, 
real  and  ideal,  nature  and  spirit  are  all 
identical  in  the  absolute. 

Tillich’s  view  of  faith  and  doubt  as 
correlates — that  faith  holds  or  hides 
doubt  in  its  heart — obscures  the  distinc- 
tion between  truth  and  falsehood.  Til- 
lich says:  “Faith  and  doubt  do  not  es- 
sentially contradict  each  other.  Faith  is 
the  continuous  tension  between  itself 
and  the  doubt  within  itself”  (p.  60). 
What  kind  of  faith  is  he  speaking  of? 
It  is  not  the  kind  of  faith  which  Abra- 
ham had  when  he  believed  that  God 
could  raise  the  dead.  It  is  not  the  faith 
which  Moses  had  when  he  endured  as 
seeing  him  who  is  invisible  when  God 
made  a slave  race  his  chosen  people 
and  delivered  them  from  a mighty  em- 
pire by  a mighty  hand  and  a stretched 
out  arm. 

It  is  not  the  faith  which  found  ex- 
pression in  the  inspired  eloquence  of 
Romans,  Chapter  8.  God  is  on  our  side, 
and  his  love  is  assured  to  us  by  facts 
of  history  which  have  never  been  suc- 
cessfully denied.  Christ  died  and  he  rose 
again  the  third  day.  Our  hope  is  a living 
hope  based  upon  these  facts  and  upon 
the  revelation  that  he  is  now  upon  the 
throne,  ever  living  to  make  intercession 
for  us.  Then  the  organ  with  all  the  stops 
open  peals  forth  in  a glorious  crescendo, 
and  the  chorus  bursts  forth  in  a tri- 
umphant challenge  to  all  the  forces  of 
the  universe  and  all  the  powers  of  evil 
to  separate  us  from  the  love  of  God 
which  is  in  Christ  Jesus  our  Lord. 

It  was  not  the  faith  of  the  early  Chris- 
tians which  placed  the  Cross  above  the 
Roman  eagle,  proud  emblem  of  imperial 
power,  Bishop  Wescott,  studying  em- 


peror worship,  says  of  the  early  Chris- 
tians that  their  witness  to  an  unseen 
world  was  “a  pledge  of  a nobler  free- 
dom than  had  ever  been  realized  among 
men:  that  the  belief  in  God,  as  made 
known  to  them  in  Christ,  was  the  one 
safeguard  against  utter  slavery.” 

Harnack,  in  his  great  work  The  Ex- 
pansion of  Christianity  in  the  First 
Three  Centuries,  declares:  “Now,  for 
the  first  time,  that  testimony  rose  among 
men,  which  cannot  ever  be  surpassed, 
the  testimony  that  God  is  Love.” 

The  vacillating  faith  with  which 
Browning’s  Bishop  Blougram,  over  his 
wine  cups,  pictures 

A life  of  doubt  diversified  by  faith, 
so  easily  interchangeable  with 

A life  of  faith  diversified  by  doubt, 

is  as  different  as  possible  from  the  faith 
which  is  a matter  of  life  and  death  to 
him  who  possesses  it.  The  Master  told 
his  disciples  not  of  a faith  which  could 
be  discussed  lightly  in  detachment  over 
the  wine  cups,  but  of  a powerful  faith 
which  could  move  mountains  and  move 
the  arm  that  moves  the  world  (Matt. 
21:21,  22).  The  Apostle  Paul,  a pris- 
oner at  Rome  and  in  the  imminent  pros- 
pect of  death,  had  the  faith  to  declare 
to  Timothy,  “I  know  whom  I have  be- 
lieved, and  am  persuaded,  that  he  is 
able  . . .”  (II  Tim.  1 :i2).  Shall  I say 
also  that  it  is  the  faith  of  Tillich  when 
he  quotes  with  profound  admiration  and 
appreciation  both  in  his  systematic  work 
and  in  his  printed  sermons  the  passage 
in  Romans  8 alluded  to  above  ? 

During  the  middle  years  of  this  cen- 
tury our  philosophical  schools  have  been 
haunted  by  the  specter  of  non-being, 
nothingness,  nihil,  or  whatever  we  may 
call  it  and  the  ghost  has  never  been  laid. 
What  are  we  to  do  about  it?  Tillich 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


58 

himself  admits  that  “the  correlation  of 
ontology  and  Biblical  religion  is  an  in- 
finite task,”  which  means  that  he  has 
not  solved  it.  For  he  says  on  the  same 
page : “Against  Pascal  I say : The  God 
of  Abraham,  Isaac  and  Jacob  and  the 
God  of  the  philosophers  is  the  same 
God.  He  is  a person  and  the  negation  of 
himself  as  a person”  (From  Biblical  Re- 
ligion, etc.,  p.  85).  The  tasks  he  assigns 
himself  is  not  only  “infinite,”  it  is  im- 
possible so  long  as  he  keeps  turning 
contradictions  into  correlates,  and  so 
long  as  he,  with  his  contemporaries, 
Heidegger  and  Sartre,  finds  a place  for 
nothingness  in  the  conception  of  God 
or  rejects  God  altogether. 

Tillich  believes  that  there  are  a few 
“converted”  philosophers  who  have  a 
“regenerated  reason”  and  that  some  of 
them  have  an  ultimate  concern  for  Be- 
ing or  being-itself,  thus  pointing  to  ulti- 
mate reality.  But  Being  is  the  last  ab- 
straction from  a host  of  finite  beings  and 
belongs  therefore,  we  have  argued,  in 
the  finite  sphere  and  cannot  be  ultimate. 
This  abstraction  then,  whether  assumed 
by  Jaspers,  Heidegger,  Sartre,  or  Til- 
lich, cannot  reach  the  ultimate  which 
can  only  be  the  ground  of  all  existence 
and  can  only  be  found  in  God.  Biblical 
religion,  whether  expressed  in  scrip- 
tural passages  (John  1 13,  Col.  1 :i6,  17 ; 
Heb.  1 :2,  3 ; I Pet.  3 :22)  or  interpreted 
in  the  creeds,  confessions,  rituals,  hymns 
and  prayers  of  all  the  leading  branches 
of  the  Church,  shows  that  God  created 
all  things  by  and  through  the  eternal 
Word,  and  is  the  Lord  of  all  Being  and 
all  history,  Lord  of  everything  with 
which  science  deals,  Lord  of  nature,  and 
Lord  of  the  destiny  of  men  and  of  na- 
tions and  empires  and  civilizations.  No 
non-theistic  existentialist  can  unite  upon 
a credible  and  consistent  ontology  which 


must  reach  to  the  ultimate  ground  of 
all  existence,  which  is  God.  No  ontol- 
ogy of  this  type  can  offer  us  a God  that 
we  can  pray  to  and  worship,  or  a God 
that  can  hear  and  answer  prayer.  Noth- 
ingness is  usually  regarded  as  something 
evil,  something  that  ought  not  to  be.  It 
is  associated  with  the  last  enemy,  death, 
and  the  fear  of  death.  What  more  fright- 
ening and  frightful  nightmare  could 
there  be  than  when  one  dreams  that  he 
is  falling  headlong  into  the  bottomless 
pit  of  extinction?  Barth  shows  clear  in- 
sight in  seeking  to  remove  Nothingness 
as  far  from  God  as  possible.  The  only 
concession  he  makes  is  to  say  that  this 
nameless  Nothing  is  what  Jesus  Christ 
destroyed  by  his  work  on  the  Cross. 
Whether  this  is  the  last  word  that  can 
be  said  on  the  subject  I cannot  say.  At 
any  rate  Biblical  religion  asserts  that 
“God  is  light  and  in  him  is  no  darkness 
at  all”  (I  John  1:5). 

Tillich  and  the  Gospels 

The  last  unkindest  cut  of  all  is  when 
Tillich  assails  the  integrity  and  truth 
of  the  Gospels  and  invalidates  the  char- 
ter of  the  faith  of  the  Church.  Listen 
carefully  when  he  says : 

“Miracles  cannot  be  interpreted  in 
terms  of  a supernatural  interference  in 
natural  processes.  If  such  an  interpreta- 
tion were  true,  the  manifestation  of  the 
ground  of  being  would  destroy  the 
structure  of  being,  God  would  be  split 
within  himself,  as  religious  dualism  has 
asserted.  It  would  be  more  adequate  to 
call  such  a miracle  ‘demonic,’  not  be- 
cause it  is  produced  by  ‘demons,’  but 
because  it  discloses  a ‘structure  of  de- 
struction’ (See  Part  IV,  Sec.  I.).  It 
corresponds  with  the  state  of  “being 
possessed’  in  the  mind  and  could  be 
called  ‘sorcery.’  The  Supra-naturalistic 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


59 


theory  of  miracles  makes  God  a sor- 
cerer and  cause  of  ‘possession’ ; it  con- 
fuses God  with  demonic  structure  in  the 
mind  and  in  reality”  ( S.T . I.,  p.  116). 

If  I use  an  ad  hominem  argument  and 
insist  that  the  “split”  is  in  Tillich  him- 
self my  only  excuse  will  be  that  he 
asked  for  it.  In  order  to  save  space  my 
comments  on  the  above  passage,  to 
adopt  a musical  figure,  will  be  in  an 
abrupt  staccato  style  rather  than  in  the 
more  smooth  and  leisurely  legato. 

1.  It  is  dangerous  for  a theologian  to 
set  limits  on  what  can  happen  in  na- 
ture, or  what  could  happen  in  Galilee 
during  the  ministry  of  Christ,  especially 
when  this  restriction  has  already  been 
removed  and  outmoded  by  the  advance 
of  science.  We  refer  to  the  postulated 
and  inviolable  “structure  of  being.” 

2.  In  recent  years  two  powerful  ham- 
mers have  been  beating  against  the  an- 
vil of  the  trustworthiness  of  the  Gos- 
pels, Bultmann’s  hammer  of  demythol- 
ogizing  in  Germany  and  Tillich’s  ham- 
mer of  deliteralizing  in  this  country.  To 
one  who  has  studied  the  course  of  Criti- 
cism from  Reimarus  to  Wrede  and  be- 
yond it  is  difficult  to  believe  that  the 
anvil  will  be  destroyed.  “The  anvil 
wears  the  hammers  out,  you  know.”  If 
one  law  of  nature  can  because  of  inter- 
ference repeal  all  the  other  laws,  then 
the  tree  which  bore  Newton’s  apple 
could  not  have  risen  one  inch  from  the 
ground. 

3.  When  a man  is  at  the  end  of  his 
rope  and  finds  that  he  cannot  save  him- 
self and  knows  that  no  man  can  by  any 
means  redeem  his  brother,  then  he  will 
look  to  the  supernatural  and  the  mighty 
works  of  God  as  his  only  hope  for  this 
life  and  the  next,  and  will  look  to  the 
Resurrection  of  Christ  which  gives 
death  its  death  blow  and  kindles  the 


sure  and  certain  hope  of  everlasting  life 
through  Jesus  Christ  our  Lord. 

4.  Enormous  industry  and  energy 
have  been  expended  in  the  past  cen- 
tury and  a half  in  the  search  for  the  “hu- 
man-historical” Jesus  underneath  the 
text  of  the  Gospels.  In  Latin  there  have 
been  three  stages  in  the  course  of  that 
great  effort.  Ant  Deus,  aut  non  bonus 
(God  or  not  good)  ; aut  Deus,  aut  non 
sanus  (God  or  not  of  sound  mind)  ; aut 
Deus,  aut  ignotus  (God  or  unknown 
and  unknowable).  Remove  the  miracu- 
lous from  the  narratives  and  no  outlines 
of  any  definite  figure  remain.  Turn  to 
the  teaching  and  only  a faint  whisper  is 
echoed  from  the  Galilean  hills.  The 
failure  to  draw  from  the  Gospels  a 
credible  picture  of  a non-miraculous 
Jesus  has  built  up  a cumulative  argu- 
ment of  great  power  for  the  truth  of  the 
Gospel  miracles. 

5.  The  cure  for  science  when  it  seems 
to  invalidate  religion  is  more  and  better 
science.  Tillich  when  he  makes  his  orac- 
ular diatribe  against  miracles  quoted 
above,  is,  if  I understand  him,  living  in 
the  Newtonian,  not  the  Einstein  age. 
His  untouchable  “structure  of  being”  (I 
must  qualify  again  by  saying  if  I un- 
derstand him)  seems  to  imply  a block 
world,  making  our  universe  a block 
universe  of  matter  and  motion,  a rigidly 
deterministic  mechanical  universe  of 
matter  and  motion,  and  making  man 
into  an  automaton.  In  plain  English 
this  is  not  an  up-to-date  science. 

Newton’s  laws  of  motion  and  of  mat- 
ter afterward  hardened  into  the  strictly 
mechanical  view  of  the  universe.  My 
fellow  townsman,  Albert  Einstein  in 
Princeton,  is  my  authority  for  saying 
that  this  theory  is  no  longer  a postulate 
of  science. 

Einstein  practically  preached  its  fu- 


6o 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


neral  sermon  when  he  said  that  the  ad- 
vance of  electrical  science  has  “caused 
a complete  breakdown  of  the  belief  that 
all  phenomena  can  be  explained  me- 
chanically.” And  again  that  “the  new 
quantum  physics  removes  us  still  fur- 
ther from  the  old  mechanical  view,  and 
a retreat  to  the  former  position  seems, 
more  than  ever,  unlikely”  (Einstein  and 
Infeld,  The  Evolution  of  Physics,  1938, 
pp.  125,  309). 

Science,  to  make  way  for  its  own  ad- 
vance, removed  the  strait  jacket  from 
the  spirit  of  man,  and  opened  a wide 
avenue  for  the  freedom  of  God  in  the 
exercise  of  his  grace. 

6.  Some  would  discard  all  the  deeds 
of  Jesus  but  save  his  words  out  of  the 
wreck.  Let  us  see  how  what  he  began 
to  do  and  to  teach  are  separable.  Bult- 
mann  in  his  Jesus,  1929,  saved  the 
words  of  Jesus  from  the  wreck,  but 
said  that  if  Jesus  of  Nazareth  never 
existed  it  would  make  no  difference  to 
his  religious  life.  Tillich  in  his  printed 
sermons  says  that  Jesus  is  not  the  truth 
because  his  teachings  are  true,  but  the 
other  way  about.  His  teachings  are  true 
because  he  is  the  truth  ( The  New  Be- 
ing, p.  70).  Look  for  a moment  at  the 
eleventh  chapter  of  Matthew,  contain- 
ing the  most  intimate  disclosure  of  his 
relations  to  God  in  the  Synoptic  Gos- 
pels and  the  great  invitation  to  bur- 
dened man.  When  the  Baptist  sends  to 
ask,  “Are  you  he  that  is  to  come?”  the 
answer  of  Jesus  was  his  works.  “The 
blind  receive  their  sight  and  the  lame 
walk,  lepers  are  cleansed  and  the  deaf 
hear,  and  the  dead  are  raised  up,  and 
the  poor  have  the  good  news  preached 
to  them”  (Matt.  11 :5).  The  guilt  of  the 
cities  where  his  mighty  works  were 
done  was  that  they  were  blind  to  the 
meaning  of  his  redeeming  works  (Matt. 


11 :2i-24).  If  the  works  were  false,  so 
were  the  words  (See  also  John  15:22- 
24.). 

7.  I must  say  a word  about  the  Res- 
urrection where  a volume  would  be 
more  adequate.  Tillich  rejects  the  physi- 
cal theory,  although  he  says  it  is  the 
most  beautiful,  and  the  psychological 
theory  of  visions,  and  proposes  a “Res- 
titution Theory.”  This  is  that  some  dis- 
ciples who  had  fled  to  Galilee  became 
convinced  the  New  Being  into  whom 
the  “man  Jesus”  had  been  transformed, 
could  not  have  been  defeated  by  his 
death  as  a criminal.  This  subjective  ex- 
perience, followed  by  others,  was  the 
origin,  overlaid  by  legendary  matter,  of 
the  faith  in  the  Resurrection.  Til- 
lich’s Resurrection  theory  means  a 
man-made  resurrection  instead  of  a rais- 
ing from  the  dead  by  the  power  of  God. 
(References  are  too  numerous  and  need 
not  be  given.)  The  restitution  theory 
is  weak,  made  by  disciples  in  Galilee 
who  had  never  investigated  the  empty 
tomb.  In  a couple  of  places  Tillich  sup- 
ports the  judgment  that  his  theory  is 
weak.  “It  (the  theory,  while  he  thinks 
adequate)  must  also  be  considered  a 
theory.  . . .”  It  remains  (he  says  can- 
didly) “in  the  realm  of  probability,  and 
does  not  have  the  certainty  of  faith” 
(S.T.  I.,  p.  58).  He  adds  that  “the  at- 
titude of  the  New  Testament  and  espe- 
cially of  the  non-literalistic  Apostle 
Paul  justifies  the  theory  of  restitution” 
(ibid).  Was  Paul  non-literalistic  when 
he  said  that  Christ  died,  was  buried, 
arose  on  the  third  day,  and  appeared  to 
Cephas,  then  to  the  twelve?  (I  Cor. 
15:3,  4).  Was  he  non-literalistic  and 
could  be  accused  of  “literalistic  distor- 
tion of  symbols  and  myths”  (ibid.,  p. 
152)  when  on  the  way  to  Damascus  the 
Risen  Lord  spoke  to  him  in  his  child- 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


61 


hood’s  language,  in  words  twice  re- 
peated before  Agrippa  and  before  the 
mob  in  Jerusalem,  and  reported  again  by 
his  most  intimate  friend,  Luke  (Chap- 
ters 9,  22,  and  26)  ? Who  in  the  world 
could  have  invented  those  words  of 
identity  with  the  church,  “Why  do  you 
; persecute  me?”  words  which  burnt 
themselves  into  Paul’s  memory  and 
changed  the  course  of  his  life  and  the 
history  of  Europe?  A noted  French 
New  Testament  scholar,  Maurice  Go- 
guel,  has  found  the  source  of  the  four 
Gospels  in  a narrative  written  during 
the  eighteen  months  before  the  conver- 
sion of  Paul  which  closed  with  the  pas- 
sion and  left  out  both  the  Resurrection 
and  the  Great  Commission  in  Matt.  28. 
I am  ready  now  to  rest  my  assurance 
of  Jesus’  resurrection  upon  a single  ar- 
gument, until  it  is  refuted.  Who  at  this 
period  would  have  written  such  a “gos- 
pel” of  bad  news  as  is  contemplated? 
Would  the  Jews  who  hated  Jesus  and 
wanted  to  forget  him?  Would  the  Jews 
who  were  bitterly  disappointed  by  the 
hoped  for  political  Messiah?  Would  the 
Christians  and  Apostles  who,  before 
they  saw  the  empty  tomb  and  the  marks 
in  the  hands  of  the  risen  Savior,  were 
in  deep  despondency  and  despair  ? Who 
would  think  of  writing  the  life  of  one 
who  died  seemingly  in  defeat  and  disil- 
lusion and  ended  his  life  in  desertion, 
darkness  and  blood?  I am  glad  that 
there  are  “many  proofs”  (Acts  1:3), 
the  most  convincing  and  irrefutable 
among  which  are  the  empty  grave  never 
accounted  for,  the  appearances  to  a 
number  of  well-known  people  who 
lived  long  after  the  event,  and  then  our 
fellowship  with  the  Father  and  with  his 
Son,  Jesus  Christ,  who  has  promised 
to  be  with  us  all  the  days.  It  is  good  for 
us  to  see  how  broadly  based  is  our  cer- 


tainty of  the  resurrection.  It  is  well  for 
us  to  walk  about  Zion,  to  tell  the  tow- 
ers thereof,  to  mark  well  her  bulwarks 
and  consider  her  palaces  that  we  may 
tell  the  generation  following.  This  God 
is  our  God  forever  and  ever.  He  will  be 
our  guide  even  unto  death. 

It  would  strengthen  my  hypothesis  of 
the  two  Tillichs  if  time  and  space  per- 
mitted us  to  place  in  parallel  columns 
what  he  says  in  his  Systematic  Theology 
and  in  his  printed  sermons.  It  is  my 
misfortune  that  I have  never  heard 
him  preach.  In  his  ecstatic  mood  and  his 
moments  of  illumination  he  has  in- 
sights, as  when  he  is  in  the  pulpit  or 
preparing  for  it,  insights  that  can  il- 
lume and  inspire  his  hearers  and  read- 
ers. Comparison  between  his  two  moods 
show  that  contradictions  have  no  terror 
for  him.  Is  the  relation  between  the  two 
teachings  correlation  or  polarity?  He  is 
certainly  equally  sincere  and  conscien- 
tious in  both  roles.  His  divided  loyalty 
is  a challenge  to  the  psychologist.  He 
has  two  sermons  on  healing,  one  of 
them  with  the  text  (Matt.  10:1)  that 
Jesus  gave  his  disciples  authority  “to 
overcome  unclean  spirits,  to  cast  them 
out,  and  to  heal  every  disease  and  every 
infirmity.”  There  can  be  no  doubt,  as 
I see  it,  that  Jesus  was  conscious  of 
having  miraculous  power  which  he 
never  used  for  his  own  advantage.  In 
the  second  sermon  he  says  that  “the 
woman  who  encountered  him,”  a chron- 
ic invalid  for  many  years,  “was  made 
whole,  the  demoniac  who  met  him,” 
who  broke  bonds  and  fetters  was  the 
terror  of  the  neighborhood,  “was  liber- 
ated from  his  mental  cleavage”  ( The 
New  Being,  p.  43).  These  cases  were 
surely  miracles ; they  are  wonderful, 
they  were  signs  of  his  redeeming  pow- 


62 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


er  and  part  of  it,  and  of  destroying  the 
work  of  the  devil  and  restoring  lost  in- 
tegrity of  personality. 

Miracles  are  not  excess  baggage,  they 
are  not  the  cargo  which  may  be  thrown 
over  to  lighten  the  ship,  they  are  the 
ballast  which  keeps  the  ship  steady  amid 
the  shriek  of  the  tempest  and  the  surg- 
ing of  the  waves.  They  are  the  break- 
ing through  of  the  spiritual  into  the 
natural  order  for  a redemptive  purpose. 
They  answer  the  questions  of  our  deep- 
est and  most  passionate  and  most  per- 
sonal concerns : Does  God  exist  ? Can 
he  save  me  ? 

We  are  reminded  often  that  no  final 
appraisal  of  Tillich’s  work  should  be 


made  until  his  third  volume  appears. 
Then  we  may  hope  that  the  differences 
between  the  two  Tillichs  may  be  made 
less  glaring.  When  we  remember  Au- 
gustine’s Retractations,  the  changes  in 
Barth’s  views  since  he  wrote  his  com- 
mentary on  the  Epistle  to  the  Romans, 
changes  which  all  thinkers  are  expected 
and  permitted  to  make,  and  the  radical 
and  profound  change  which  he  himself 
made  in  his  interpretation  of  the  Fall, 
we  hope  that  further  study,  reflection 
and  experience  will  cause  him  to  make 
changes,  even  radical  changes,  in  those 
aspects  of  his  teachings  which,  while 
interesting  in  their  novelty,  cut  deeply 
into  “Biblical  religion.” 


BOOK  REVIEWS 


THEOLOGY 

The  Church’s  Confession  Under 
Hitler,  by  Arthur  C.  Cochrane.  The 
Westminster  Press,  Philadelphia,  1962. 
Pp.  317.  $6.50. 

The  Barmen  Declaration  is  undoubtedly  the 
most  influential  theological  statement  of  the 
twentieth  century.  It  grew  out  of  the  Nazi 
period  of  German  history  and  was  directed 
against  the  errors  of  the  so-called  “German 
Christians,”  churchmen  who  succumbed  to  the 
Hitler  propaganda  and  who  confused  the 
ideology  of  the  Third  Reich  with  the  historic 
Christian  faith.  This  Declaration,  adopted 
by  the  First  Confessional  Synod  of  the  Ger- 
man Evangelical  Church,  meeting  in  Barmen, 
on  May  29-31,  1934,  was  the  basis  of  the 
“Confessing  Church,”  that  heroic  group  of 
Reformed,  Lutheran,  and  United  church 
members  who  furnished  the  most  consistent 
opposition  to  Hitler  of  any  German  group. 

It  is  the  author’s  contention  that  Barmen 
represents  something  more  than  resistance  to 
a totalitarian  state.  “From  is  inception,”  he 
writes,  “it  was  essentially  a struggle  of  the 
Church  against  itself  for  itself.  It  was  a strug- 
gle to  recover  the  confession  of  faith  and  a 
struggle  to  remain  faithful  to  it  in  the  preach- 
ing and  actions  of  the  Church.”  Barmen,  by 
pointing  the  Church  back  to  Holy  Scripture 
and  to  her  historic  confessions,  enabled  the 
Church  to  rediscover  itself,  its  primary  al- 
legiance, and  thus  its  proper  mission  in  the 
German  Reich. 

The  first  chapter  details  the  background 
of  the  Nazi  movement,  the  second  contains 
a description  of  the  theological  movement 
between  1917  and  1933,  and  subsequent  chap- 
ters trace  the  history  of  the  emerging  strug- 
gle between  the  “German  Christians”  and  the 
“Confessing  Church,”  culminating  in  the 
Synod  of  Barmen.  Many  familiar  figures 
appear  in  these  pages : Karl  Barth,  the  spirit 
behind  Barmen  and  the  hero  of  the  book, 
Martin  Niemoller  and  his  brother,  Otto  Pi- 
per, Wilhelm  Niesel,  Hans  Asmussen,  and 
a host  of  others  that  should  not  be  forgotten. 
In  an  age  of  expediency  they  demonstrated 
to  us  how  to  stand. 


In  the  final  chapter,  “The  Nature  of  a 
Confession  of  Faith,”  the  author  uses  the 
Church  struggle  to  illustrate  the  characteris- 
tics of  a genuine  Confession  and  raises  the 
question  of  the  significance  of  Barmen  for 
the  Church  today.  It  is  to  be  regretted  that 
this  question  was  not  answered  and  that  the 
author  did  not  go  further  by  pointing  out  the 
implications  of  Barmen  for  present  situa- 
tions in  which  the  Church  must  struggle 
“against  itself  for  itself”  in  order  to  be  a 
viable  instrument  of  its  Lord. 

Dr.  Cochrane  is  the  distinguished  profes- 
sor of  systematic  theology  in  Dubuque  Theo- 
logical Seminary  and  an  authority  in  the 
theology  of  Karl  Barth.  In  this  book  he  has 
rendered  a much-needed  service,  not  only 
in  detailing  the  history  of  the  German  church 
struggle,  but  also  in  supplying  in  a series 
of  appendices  the  not  readily  available  texts 
of  many  of  the  most  important  documents  it 
produced. 

Jas.  I.  McCord 

The  Second  Vatican  Council,  by 
Henri  Daniel-Rops.  Hawthorn  Books 
Inc.,  New  York,  1962.  Pp.  160.  $3.50. 

The  Council,  Reform  and  Reunion, 
by  Hans  Kiing.  Sheed  and  Ward,  New 
York,  1961.  Pp.  208.  $3.95. 

The  decision  to  summon  an  ecumenical 
council  came  as  a sudden  inspiration  to  Pope 
John  XXIII  (“Suddenly  and  unexpectedly 
we  were  struck”),  and  since  its  announcement 
speculation  has  been  rife  about  its  every  as- 
pect. For  one  thing,  will  it  be  called  a con- 
tinuation of  the  First  Vatican  Council,  which 
was  never  adjourned  but  was  ended  by  the 
approach  of  Piedmontese  artillery  without 
getting  far  into  its  agenda  but  after  promul- 
gating the  dogma  of  papal  infallibility,  or  the 
Second  Vatican  Council?  (Correspondence 
from  the  Vatican  now  refers  to  the  Second 
Council).  Other  questions  concern  agenda, 
the  role  of  Protestant  observers,  and  how 
long  the  council  will  run.  The  October  open- 
ing date  has  been  announced,  with  the  first 
session  recessing  before  Christmas,  but  pre- 
sumably second  and  third  sessions  will  be  held, 


64 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


one  after  Easter  and  the  other  in  the  fall  of 
1963,  and  there  may  be  more. 

There  is  reason,  of  course,  for  both  specu- 
lation and  anticipation.  Vatican  Councils  are 
not  scheduled  regularly,  as  are  Assemblies 
of  the  World  Council  of  Churches.  Through- 
out the  Church’s  history  there  have  been 
only  twenty  ecumenical  councils,  the  first  con- 
vened by  the  Emperor  Constantine  in  Nicea 
in  325  and  the  twentieth  held  in  the  Vatican 
in  1869-1870.  Moreover,  ecumenical  councils 
have  extraordinary  powers ; they  are  above 
canon  law.  As  Dr.  Kiing  comments,  a Vatican 
Council  “in  union  with  the  Pope  . . . has 
universal  legislative  authority  in  every  field 
of  ecclesiastical  law,  and  can  thus  carry  out 
full-scale  reform  throughout  the  entire 
Church.”  This  power,  and  the  possibility  it 
holds,  will  explain  why  many  inside  the 
Roman  Catholic  Church  as  well  as  outside  it 
look  forward  in  anxious  anticipation  to  the 
Council’s  decisions. 

Henri  Daniel-Rops  and  Hans  Kiing  are 
Catholics,  the  former  a member  of  the  French 
Academy  and  the  latter  a member  of  the 
Catholic  Theological  faculty  of  Tubingen 
and  author  of  a widely  praised  study  of  Karl 
Barth’s  theology. 

Daniel-Rops’  volume  bears  the  subtitle, 
“The  Story  behind  the  Ecumenical  Council  of 
Pope  John  XXIII,”  and  is  written  for  those 
who  want  a short,  popular  sketch  of  the  ear- 
lier councils  and  of  the  organizational  prepa- 
rations for  the  upcoming  one. 

Hans  Kiing’s  volume  is  another  matter.  It 
is  a work  of  major  significance  and  deserves 
a wide  reading,  as  much  by  American  Catho- 
lics as  by  Protestants.  Here,  too,  there  is 
historical  material,  but  the  author’s  real  con- 
cern is  with  what  the  Vatican  Council  might 
accomplish.  He  begins  by  citing  the  change 
of  atmosphere  the  Council’s  announcement 
has  brought  about  on  both  sides,  the  grow- 
ing dialogue  between  Catholics  and  Protes- 
tants and  the  relaxed  attitudes  within  both 
traditions.  Professor  Kiing’s  great  hope  is 
that  the  Council  will  be  an  instrument  of 
renewal  within  Catholicism.  He  points  out 
that  reformation  is  not  a Protestant  monop- 
oly but  is  necessary  also  for  Rome,  since  it 
too  is  a “communio  peccatorum,”  and  illus- 
trates how  the  Church  has  been  renewed  in 
the  past.  Catholic  renewal  must  steer  a course 
between  “opportunist  modernism”  and  “op- 


portunist traditionalism”  in  “fidelity  to  the 
Gospel  of  Jesus  Christ,”  the  author  argues, 
and  then  sets  down  certain  reforming  ideals 
for  the  Church  today.  They  include  a fresh 
appreciation  of  the  genuinely  religious  mo- 
tives in  the  Protestant  Reformation,  increased 
concern  for  Holy  Scripture,  development  of 
the  liturgy  into  a people’s  liturgy,  a fresh 
understanding  of  universal  priesthood,  and  a 
greater  emphasis  on  the  devotional  life  of  the 
ordinary  church  member.  Throughout  Pro- 
fessor Kiing  writes  with  great  candor  and 
with  eager  expectation  of  the  Council’s  re- 
sults. In  any  tug  of  war  that  may  be  going 
on  within  the  papal  curia  it  is  to  be  hoped 
that  those  of  Kiing’s  persuasion  will  be  vic- 
torious. 

Both  authors  write  as  loyal  members  of  the 
Catholic  Church  and  as  defenders  of  the 
Petrine  office.  They  agree  that  the  Council 
will  not  proceed  with  any  new  definition  of 
Marian  dogmas  or  develop  further  definitions 
of  controversial  theological  doctrines.  Rather, 
the  Council  will  be,  as  Cardinal  Tardini  has 
remarked,  “an  internal  event  in  the  Church.” 
To  this,  Pope  John  added,  in  his  Encyclical, 
“Ad  Petri  Cathedram”: 

The  chief  end  of  the  council  is  to  advance 
the  development  of  the  Catholic  Faith,  the 
renewal  of  Christian  life  among  the  peo- 
ple, the  adaption  of  ecclesiastical  discipline 
to  contemporary  conditions.  Assuredly,  this 
will  afford  a wonderful  spectacle  of  truth, 
of  unity,  of  charity,  and  we  are  confident 
that  in  seeing  it  those  who  are  separated 
from  this  Apostolic  See  will  see  in  it  a 
warm  invitation  to  seek  and  find  unity. 

It  is  clear,  then,  that  the  Council  will  not 
meet  to  discuss  union.  There  is  a prior  ques- 
tion with  which  to  deal.  It  is  intended  to  be 
a reforming  or  renewing  Council,  within 
Catholicism.  Observers  from  the  World  Coun- 
cil of  Churches  and  the  various  confessional 
bodies  have  accepted  invitations  to  attend. 
They  are,  in  the  main,  theologians  and  his- 
torians, scholars  who  will  serve  as  eyes  of 
the  Protestant  Churches  and  who  cannot  by 
any  stretch  of  the  imagination  be  thought  of 
as  officials  able  to  negotiate  union.  It  would 
be  foolish  to  expect  anything  more  to  come 
out  of  the  Council  than  certain  reforms  with- 
in the  Roman  Church,  but  this  in  itself  is  of 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


65 


the  greatest  significance  and  should  engage 
the  interest  and  prayers  of  every  Christian. 

Jas.  I.  McCord 

Communism  and  Christian  Faith,  by 
Lester  de  Koster,  Wm.  B.  Eerdmans, 
Grand  Rapids,  Mich.,  1962.  Pp.  158. 
$3-50. 

This  vigorous  book  is  an  expansion  of  an 
earlier  volume,  All  Ye  That  Labor,  now  out 
of  print.  It  is  a well-balanced  treatment  of 
the  subject  by  a writer  who  is  passionately 
interested  in  truth  without  favor.  His  anti- 
communism is  unimpeachable,  at  times  over- 
emphasized. But  he  places  it  within  the  so- 
cial recognition  that  Communism  has  its  ap- 
peal in  large  parts  of  the  world  because  of  the 
illusions  and  injustices  of  economic  liberal- 
ism ; and  he  places  it  within  the  theological 
understanding  that  the  battleground  between 
God  and  the  Devil  is  within  ourselves  first 
of  all,  and  that  the  crisis  of  Communism  pre- 
sents us  with  a judgment.  It  is  on  the  whole 
the  Calvinist  sense  of  God’s  judgment  and 
a rigorous  loyalty  to  a truth  which  cannot  be 
made  in  our  social  image  which  tames  and 
directs  the  author’s  abhorrence  of  the  whole 
Communist  system  into  constructive  chan- 
nels. It  is  therefore  a useful  book  placed 
against  Fred  Schwarz’  “Christian  Anti-Com- 
munism” and  alongside  of  John  Bennett’s 
Christianity  and  Communism  Today  (As- 
sociation Press),  the  National  Council  of 
Churches’  Christian’s  Handbook  on  Com- 
munism, and  similar  volumes  as  study  ma- 
terial for  intelligent  church  groups. 

The  book  has  one  weakness.  It  is  not  writ- 
ten out  of  experience  with  Communists  where 
they  are  active  or  powerful.  It  therefore  lacks 
the  subtlety  of  human  insight  to  be  a pro- 
found book.  This  shows  up  in  the  bibliography 
as  well  as  in  the  writing,  where  some  of  the 
finest  treatments  of  Christian-Communist  en- 
counter by  those  engaged  in  it,  are  missing. 
To  name  three  of  them:  Helmut  Gollwitzer, 
Unwilling  Journey  (Muhlenberg  Press) ; 
Nicholas  Berdyaev,  The  Origin  of  Russian 
Communism  (U.  of  Michigan  Press)  ; and 
Johannes  Hamel,  A Christian  in  East  Ger- 
many (Association  Press). 

Charles  C.  West 


BIBLICAL 

The  Thanksgiving  Hymns.  Trans- 
lated and  Annotated  with  an  Introduc- 
tion. (Studies  on  the  texts  of  the  Desert 
of  Judah.  Edited  by  J.  van  der  Ploeg, 
Volume  III),  by  Menahem  Mansoor. 
Wm.  B.  Eerdmans,  Grand  Rapids  3, 
Michigan,  1961.  Pp.  xi  -f-  227.  $7.00. 

The  life  of  the  Essene  was  devoted  en- 
tirely to  the  praise  of  God  and  the  study 
of  his  word.  We  not  only  have  many  “pesh- 
ers”  or  commentaries  on  various  books  of  the 
Old  Testament  from  the  library  at  Qumran, 
but  we  also  have  a collection  of  hymns  which 
were  used  in  the  worship  of  the  community. 
Several  translations  of  these  noble  hymns  are 
now  available  in  various  handbooks  on  the 
Dead  Sea  Scrolls,  but  the  definitive  work  in 
English  is  the  book  under  review,  written  by 
Prof.  Menahem  Mansoor,  of  the  University 
of  Wisconsin.  These  deeply  spiritual  psalms, 
or  Hodayoth,  as  they  are  known  in  Hebrew, 
resemble  and  often  echo  the  language  of  the 
Biblical  psalms.  They  constitute  an  impor- 
tant source  for  the  theological  doctrines  of 
the  Qumran  Sect.  In  the  introduction  to  this 
volume,  the  author  devotes  a long  chapter  to 
the  study  of  the  most  important  of  these  doc- 
trines. 

The  main  purpose  of  the  book,  however,  is 
to  give  the  reader  a study  of  the  Essene 
hymns  based  on  the  texts  themselves.  The 
description  and  dating  of  the  scroll,  the  lin- 
guistic aspects  of  the  Hebrew  text  and  its 
relation  to  Biblical  Hebrew  are  expertly  dis- 
cussed by  Prof.  Mansoor  in  the  introduction. 
He,  like  Dupont-Sommer  and  Licht,  divides 
the  contents  of  the  scroll  into  thirty-two  in- 
dividual hymns,  most  of  which  begin  with 
the  stereotyped  formula,  “I  praise  thee,  0 
Lord,  because.  . . .”  The  author  also  sup- 
plies us  with  a summary  of  each  hymn. 

One  of  the  puzzling  problems  of  these  re- 
ligious poems  is  their  authorship.  In  most 
cases  they  seem  to  reflect  the  personal  ex- 
periences and  feelings  of  a single  individual. 
Although  the  Teacher  of  Righteousness,  the 
reputed  founder  of  the  Qumran  Community, 
is  never  mentioned  in  the  Hymn  Scroll,  many 
scholars  believe  that  he  is  the  author  of  the 
work,  especially  when  one  compares  what  is 


66 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


said  about  the  Teacher  of  Righteousness  in 
the  Habakkuk  Commentary  and  the  Damas- 
cus Document  with  the  obviously  autobio- 
graphical passages  in  the  Essene  hymns.  If 
this  theory  of  authorship  proves  to  be  correct, 
we  must  recognize  from  these  mystical  con- 
fessions one  of  the  loftiest  figures  in  the  his- 
tory of  religion. 

After  the  lengthy  introduction  there  fol- 
lows the  excellent  translation  of  the  hymns 
themselves.  “The  purpose  here  is  to  present 
an  authentic  translation,  as  faithful  as  pos- 
sible to  the  source.  It  is  humbly  hoped  that 
competent  scholars  and  theologians  with  no 
access  to  Hebrew  will  be  able  to  use  the  text 
as  a basis  for  further  studies  and  research” 
(p.  96).  This  method  contrasts  sharply  with 
that  of  T.  H.  Gaster  in  his  translation  of 
the  scrolls  {The  Dead  Sea  Scriptures  in 
English  Translation,  N.Y.,  1956),  which  is 
more  often  a paraphrase  with  little  docu- 
mentation to  support  his  free  renditions. 

Prof.  Mansoor’s  translation  is  annotated 
with  copious  textual,  lexicographical  and 
theological  notes.  One  is  impressed  not  only 
with  the  author’s  erudition  in  textual  and 
philological  matters,  but  also  with  his  sound 
judgment  and  open-mindedness  in  matters  of 
interpretation.  Twelve  pages  of  bibliography 
and  numerous  indices  add  to  the  value  of  this 
outstanding  volume  on  the  Thanksgiving 
Hymns  from  Qumran. 

Charles  T.  Fritsch 

The  Royal  Psalms,  by  Keith  R. 
Crim.  John  Knox  Press,  Richmond, 
Va.,  1962.  Pp.  127.  $2.75. 

One  of  the  most  significant  phases  of  Old 
Testament  study  in  the  past  few  decades  has 
been  the  investigation  of  the  nature  of  king- 
ship  in  Israel — its  origins,  its  influence  on 
Israel’s  religion,  and  its  relation  to  the  Mes- 
sianic hope.  In  this  book  Dr.  Crim,  Associ- 
ate Professor  of  Bible  at  Taejon  Presbyterian 
College  in  Korea,  introduces  to  American 
readers  the  research  of  German  and  Scandi- 
navian scholars  on  the  so-called  “Messianic” 
Psalms,  which  were  used  in  connection  with 
the  annual  celebration  of  the  Davidic  king- 
ship,  the  Royal  Zion  Festival.  The  author 
gives  an  exposition  of  Pss.  2,  72,  no  and 


seven  others,  plus  a study  of  2 Samuel  23 : 
1-7,  in  the  second  part  of  the  book. 

The  first  part  sets  the  stage  for  the  ex- 
position by  discussing  in  detail  the  begin- 
nings of  the  Israelite  monarchy  and  its 
unique  charismatic  character,  the  Biblical 
evidence  for  a yearly  festival  commemorating 
the  choice  of  Jerusalem  and  the  Davidic 
dynasty  for  the  rule  of  God’s  people,  and  the 
importance  of  these  concepts  for  the  Mes- 
sianic ideal  in  Israel’s  thought  and  life. 

This  book  serves  as  an  excellent  introduc- 
tion to  a significant  yet  complex  area  of  re- 
search in  Old  Testament  studies  today.  It 
should  be  of  particular  value  for  the  preach- 
ing ministry,  as  well  as  for  the  Seminary 
classroom. 

Charles  T.  Fritsch 

The  Scrolls  and  Christian  Origins, 
by  Matthew  Black.  Charles  Scribner’s 
Sons,  New  York,  1961.  Pp.  206.  $3.95. 

The  basis  of  this  important  book  was  a 
course  of  lectures  delivered  in  May,  1956,  in 
Union  Theological  Seminary,  New  York. 
Even  though  publication  is  five  years  later, 
the  value  of  the  book  is  not  seriously  harmed, 
since  its  focus  is  not  so  much  on  the  scrolls 
themselves  as  on  the  light  which  they  shed 
upon  the  beginnings  of  Christianity.  Profes- 
sor Black,  Principal  of  St.  Mary’s  College, 
University  of  St.  Andrews  in  Scotland  and  a 
distinguished  New  Testament  scholar,  takes 
us  backstage  of  New  Testament  times  and 
shows  us,  from  Jewish  and  patristic  sources, 
how  widespread  the  “movement  of  Jewish 
or  para-Jewish  ‘non-conformity’”  was  in  the 
early  days  of  Christianity.  Numerous  Jewish 
sects,  of  which  the  Qumran  Essenes  were 
just  one  group,  presented  a “solid  and  un- 
broken front  to  the  established  religion  of  the 
day,”  and,  according  to  the  author,  it  was 
from  this  “unorthodox”  side  of  Judaism  that 
Christianity  sprang.  “It  seems  probable  that 
this  vast  movement  of  ‘Jewish’  or  ‘Hebrew’ 
sectarianism  represents  the  survival  into  New 
Testament  times  of  the  old  pre-Ezra  type  of 
Hebrew  religion ; and  its  puritanism  would 
then  stem  from  the  ancient  asceticism  of  the 
religion  of  Israel”  (p.  167). 

Professor  Black  believes  that  the  link  be- 
tween this  side  of  Judaism  and  the  New 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


67 


Testament  is  to  be  found  in  the  ‘Hebraists’ 
or  Hebrew  Christians  of  the  Book  of  Acts, 
and  more  particularly  in  the  “Sect  of  the 
Nazarenes”  (Acts  24:5),  which  continued 
the  ancient  Israelite  institution  of  the  life- 
long Nazirite.  This  same  Nazirite  strain  can 
be  detected  in  John  the  Baptist,  whose  rela- 
tion to  Qumran  and  its  teachings  is  recog- 
nized by  most  scholars. 

The  last  part  of  the  book  deals  with  the 
religious  institutions  and  theological  concep- 
tions of  the  scrolls,  especially  with  those 
which  bear  some  resemblance  or  relationship 
to  Christian  ideas  or  institutions.  The  Qum- 
ran baptismal  rites,  which  were  practised  in 
relation  to  a movement  of  repentance  and 
entry  into  a New  Covenant,  “prepared  the 
way,  at  some  considerable  remove,  for  the 
full  Christian  doctrine  of  baptism”  (p.  98). 
The  sacred  meal  of  the  Qumran  priestly  type, 
with  its  Messianic  overtones,  may  well  lie 
behind  the  earliest  forms  of  the  Eucharist 
in  the  primitive  Church. 

The  author  has  a good  deal  to  say  about 
the  eschatological  beliefs  of  the  Qumran 
community.  He  points  out  that  many  of  these 
ideas  are  derived  from  the  closing  chapters 
of  Ezekiel.  He  might  well  have  noted  in  this 
connection  that  the  very  site  of  Qumran 
was  probably  chosen  by  the  Essenes  for 
eschatological  reasons  based  on  Ezekiel  47. 

This  is  a scholarly  work  which  shows  great 
erudition  on  the  part  of  the  author.  One  may 
disagree  with  some  of  his  ideas  regarding 
the  historical  origins  of  the  sect,  or  the 
identity  of  the  Teacher  of  Righteousness,  but 
no  one  who  is  interested  in  the  importance 
of  the  Dead  Sea  Scrolls  for  New  Testa- 
ment studies  can  afford  to  ignore  this  book. 

Charles  T.  Fritsch 

When  Israel  Came  Out  of  Egypt, 
by  Gabriel  Hebert.  John  Knox  Press, 
Richmond,  Virginia,  1961.  Pp.  128. 
$i-75- 

This  slim  volume  devotes  its  five  chapters 
to  a consideration  of  the  Exodus  as  an  event 
in  the  faith  of  Israel,  and  in  the  history  of 
the  world,  considering  the  use  of  that  event 
in  the  narratives  of  the  Bible,  the  relation 
of  that  event  to  Moses,  and  its  meaning  for 
Christianity. 


The  approach  of  the  author  is  avowedly 
devotional,  not  critical.  As  a consequence, 
the  role  of  the  God  of  Israel,  in  and  through 
the  historical  event  of  the  Exodus,  is  given 
primary  consideration.  A sane  view  of  the 
miraculous  elements  involved  helps  to  make 
that  consideration  valid  and  coercive.  The 
Covenant  is  thus  seen,  and  rightly  so,  as  the 
complement  to  the  Exodus  as  an  event,  and 
as  the  means  whereby  the  relation  of  Israel 
to  her  independent  Deity  is  resolved.  The 
necessary  point  is  also  made  that  one  cannot 
take  the  faith  of  Israel  seriously  without  pri- 
or commitment  to  that  faith ! For  Hebert, 
the  uniqueness  of  that  faith  rests  on  the  Ex- 
odus event,  and  the  subsequent  covenantal  re- 
lationship. 

From  the  historical  and  scholarly  side,  the 
author  makes  clear  that  the  Exodus  tradition 
can  be  given  firm  historical  ground,  in  spite 
of  the  unanswerability  of  a string  of  specifics 
connected  with  it.  He  presents  a good  sum- 
mary of  what  has  been  learned  in  the  near 
present  in  regard  to  Biblical  backgrounds, 
and  makes  plain  the  realization  that  the  Bible 
cannot  either  be  completely  documented,  or 
simply  dismissed  as  myth.  A fine  description 
is  given  of  the  transition  of  Israel  from  a 
political  unit  to  a “faith,”  based  on  the  Lord 
of  history  and  the  hope  of  future  deliverance. 
A brief,  but  good,  summary  is  also  given  of 
the  present  schools  of  Biblical  criticism,  from 
literalism  to  Uppsala,  and  the  rise  of  Biblical 
theology.  The  chronology  of  the  book  is  up 
to  date  and  the  discussion  of  the  archaeo- 
logical and  historical  setting  of  the  Exodus 
problem  is  informed.  The  plague  narrative 
is  seen  as  a conflate  account  of  JEP,  set  in 
stylized  form.  No  conclusions  are  offered 
for  the  location  of  Sinai,  other  than  the  gen- 
eral area.  The  biblical  account  of  the  cross- 
ing of  the  sea  is  presented  simply  as  a “mys- 
tery,” in  accord  with  the  devotional  view- 
point of  the  book. 

The  author  follows  Albright  on  the  Exo- 
dus dates,  and  on  certain  features  of  (early) 
Israelite  religious  development.  Wright,  et 
al.,  are  followed  in  regard  to  the  amphicty- 
onic  site,  but  Noth’s  view  of  tribal  disperse- 
ment  during  the  Exodus  period  seems  favored. 
An  Uppsalian  flavor  is  also  introduced  by 
reference  to  oral  traditions  as  an  explana- 
tion of  textual  vagaries.  The  acceptance  of 
Rowley’s  view  of  the  role  of  Joseph  (as  the 


68 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


vizier  of  Ikhnaton)  is  not  coercive,  nor  is 
the  author’s  interpretation  of  the  numbers  of 
the  Exodus  account  strictly  necessary.  The 
desire  to  establish  the  Mosaic  relation  to 
the  Exodus  event  has  led  the  author  to  hold 
both  sides  of  the  argument  equally  well!  Un- 
fortunately he  misses  the  difference  between 
later  attribution  as  a sign  of  both  veneration 
and  as  a means  of  authentication,  and  the 
actualities  of  history.  The  use  of  JHVH  con- 
fuses the  reader  unnecessarily,  including  the 
preference  of  the  author  for  that  form  over 
the  Hebrew  (sic)  YHWH.  The  “parallels” 
to  Christianity  are,  of  course,  untenable,  ex- 
cept as  devotional  comparisons — a fact  the 
author’s  style  and  purpose  make  evident.  In 
that  light,  as  well,  the  little  book  is  warmly 
recommended. 

Philip  C.  Hammond 

The  Patriarchal  Age,  by  Charles  F. 
Pfeiffer.  Baker  Book  House,  Grand 
Rapids,  Michigan,  1961.  Pp.  128.  $2.95. 

In  seventeen  extremely  brief  chapters,  the 
author  sketches  the  organization,  family  re- 
lationships, social  context,  culture  and  daily 
life  of  the  Patriarchs,  as  well  as  discussing 
the  matter  of  the  historicity  of  the  patriarchal 
narratives,  the  patriarchal  religion  and  the 
literature  involved. 

Professor  Pfeiffer  gives  the  reader  a bet- 
ter-than-average  general  coverage  of  the  Pa- 
triarchal Age  as  depicted  in  the  Old  Testa- 
ment. His  presentation  of  the  currently  known 
data  of  history  relating  to  the  period  is  also 
very  well  done,  and  his  summary  of  extant 
legal  codes  is  excellent.  In  his  opening  chap- 
ter he  furnishes  a very  brief  over-view  of 
various  views  held  in  Biblical  circles  today 
and  honestly  chooses  sides  in  the  ring  of  mod- 
ern critical  approaches  to  Biblical  scholarship. 

It  is  in  the  author’s  use  of  archaeological 
material  and  in  his  interpretations  of  history 
that  this  reviewer  finds  his  basic  criticisms, 
however.  Pfeiffer  presupposes  the  “essential 
historicity”  of  the  Biblical  records,  and  then 
feels  it  necessary  to  prove  that  historicity 
by  proof-texting,  as  it  were,  from  archaeol- 
ogy and  from  known  historical  records.  The 
assumptions  seems  to  be  that  the  historical 
validity  of  the  latter  will  uphold  the  former. 
It  is  not  to  be  denied  that  the  Patriarchal 
Period,  as  presented  in  the  Old  Testament, 


clearly  reflects  the  Middle  Bronze  Age  in 
Palestine.  Nor  is  it  to  be  doubted  that  many 
newly  discovered  records  and  practices  of 
ancient  Near  Eastern  life  mirror  situations 
to  be  found  in  the  Bible.  Yet,  correspondence 
and  proof  are  not  identical,  and  parallels  do 
not  make  patriarchs  1 

Still  in  the  realm  of  historical  interpreta- 
tion, the  author  has  a strong  tendency  to 
moralize  the  events  recorded  in  biblical  his- 
tory, and  to  evaluate  in  terms  of  contem- 
porary standards.  Any  such  reading  back  into 
the  Old  Testament  of  Christian  ethical  de- 
mands, or  even  contemporary  mores,  is  to- 
tally invalid.  Pious  reconstruction  and  ro- 
mantic supposition  becloud  the  essential  spir- 
ituality of  the  biblical  materials,  rather  en- 
hance it. 

From  the  objective  point  of  view,  the 
dichotomy  between  the  religion  of  the  patri- 
archs and  the  baalism  of  their  neighbors  is 
much  too  strongly  drawn.  That  the  pre- 
Israelite  religion  of  the  Hebrews  can  be  re- 
constructed for  the  patriarchal  period,  on  the 
basis  of  the  Biblical  text,  is  doubtful.  A naive 
universalism  is  also  introduced,  along  with 
theological  “distinctions”  (e.g.  those  of  Vos 
and  Bromiley)  which  are  not  always  neces- 
sary or  really  relevant. 

In  short,  although  some  sections  of  this 
small  volume  are  extremely  well  done,  other 
parts  must  be  read  with  the  presuppositions 
and  assumptions  of  the  author  carefully  kept 
in  mind. 

Philip  C.  Hammond 

The  Phoenicians,  by  Donald  Har- 
den. Thames  and  Hudson,  London, 
1962.  Pp.  336.  30s. 

In  this  volume  Dr.  Harden,  Director  of 
the  London  Museum,  has  presented  the  re- 
sults of  modern  scholarship  concerning  the 
Phoenicians  in  a very  readable  form.  He 
discusses  the  origins  of  the  Phoenicians,  the 
geography  and  history  of  their  homeland  and 
colonies,  their  government  and  social  struc- 
ture, their  religion,  their  language  and  script, 
their  warfare,  and  their  industry  and  com- 
merce. 

Because  of  the  scope  of  the  subject  the 
author  has  not  always  been  able  to  give  a 
detailed  treatment,  but  has  limited  himself 
to  the  most  interesting  and  important  ma- 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


69 


terial.  As  the  author  admits,  it  has  also  been 
impossible  to  give  all  the  points  of  view  in 
areas  where  the  interpretation  of  the  evi- 
dence is  controversial.  He  has  given  his  own 
interpretation,  which  is  in  most  instances  that 
of  the  majority  of  scholars  and  that  most 
easily  defended.  These  two  necessary  limita- 
tions may  at  times  be  disconcerting  to  the 
specialist  but  will  in  fact  enhance  the  in- 
terest and  value  of  the  book  for  the  reader 
who  seeks  a basic  introduction  to  the  subject. 

However,  Dr.  Harden’s  treatment  of  Phoe- 
nician inscriptions  is  less  valuable.  His  trans- 
lation of  the  inscription  of  Abibaal  is  in- 
correct. He  introduces  a problem  concerning 
the  sarcophagus  inscription  of  Eshmunazar 
which  is  answered  by  the  inscription  itself. 

Incidentally,  Dr.  Harden  is  also  inconsistent 
in  the  date  which  he  assigns  to  the  above 
mentioned  sarcophagus.  After  having  pointed 
out  the  difficulty  in  determining  the  date  of 
the  reign  of  Eshmunazar,  King  of  Sidon,  and 
having  suggested  some  date  in  the  6th  cen- 
tury B.C.  as  most  likely,  a position  with 
which  the  reviewer  takes  issue,  Dr.  Harden 
oscillates  between  dating  his  sarcophagus  to 
the  6th  century  and  to  the  5th  century. 

Nonetheless  Dr.  Harden  has  made  a real 
contribution  in  this  study  of  the  history  and 
culture  of  the  Phoenicians,  who  as  the  close 
neighbors  of  the  Israelites  strongly  influenced 
the  culture  of  Israel  and  who  left  as  a legacy 
to  the  world  one  of  its  most  important  pos- 
sessions, its  alphabet. 

William  R.  Lane 

The  Birth  of  the  Christian  Religion 
(La  Naissance  du  Christianisme)  and 
The  Origin  of  the  New  Testament  (Les 
Origines  du  Nouveau  Testament),  by 
Alfred  Firmin  Loisy.  Authorized  trans- 
lation from  the  French  by  L.  P.  Jacks. 
University  Books,  New  Hyde  Park, 
N.Y.,  1962.  Pp.  xix  -f-  414  and  332. 
$10.00. 

These  two  principal  works  of  the  most 
outstanding  Catholic  modernist  were  pub- 
lished in  1933  and  1936  and  appeared  in  Eng- 
lish translations  in  London  in  1948  and  1950 
respectively.  Covering  the  whole  ground  of 
New  Testament  History  and  Introduction, 


they  exhibit  both  the  brilliance  of  the  French 
author’s  mind  and  also  its  conspicuous  weak- 
nesses. Father  Loisy  had  a complete  com- 
mand of  the  vast  amount  of  information 
available  in  those  two  areas,  and  he  interprets 
and  arranges  it  in  a most  imposing  way.  But 
the  principle  of  strict  rationality  which  he 
applies  to  his  subject,  and  which  makes  his 
picture  of  the  Primitive  Church  so  impres- 
sive, is  also  his  undoing.  If  this  picture  of 
early  Christianity  presents  a coherent  and 
consistent  picture,  it  is  because  he  fills  in  the 
many  gaps  of  information  with  daring  hy- 
potheses. Moreover,  with  his  positivistic-so- 
ciological outlook  he  completely  fails  to  ac- 
count for  the  greatness  of  Jesus  and  his  apos- 
tles, as  well  as  for  the  strangeness  of  the 
events  that  took  place  in  the  early  decades 
of  our  era. 

Loisy  was  a rebel  by  nature.  He  rose  up 
not  only  against  his  own  church.  Deeply 
influenced  as  he  was  by  liberal  Protestant 
scholarship,  he,  nevertheless,  rebelled  against 
it,  too.  In  his  view,  it  was  full  of  contradic- 
tions and  lacked  the  courage  of  imagination. 
In  his  desire  to  overcome  its  failures  he  acted 
as  heir  of  a tradition,  which  considered  his- 
tory primarily  as  the  outcome  of  man’s  in- 
tellectual efforts,  and  thus  the  whole  history 
of  the  Primitive  Church  was  interpreted  as 
proceeding  in  logical  sequence.  Modern  Bib- 
lical scholarship  has  in  the  meantime  become 
aware  of  the  vexing  element  of  irrationalism 
in  history  and  of  its  apparent  whims.  The 
modern  scholar  is  far  less  inclined  to  contend 
that  he  knows  everything  and  he  is  capable 
of  explaining  all  the  riddles  of  history.  In 
view  of  this  radical  change  of  scholarly  cli- 
mate, Loisy’s  great  work,  suggestive  and 
stimulating  as  it  is,  is  definitely  dated. 

Otto  A.  Piper 

Lists  of  Words  Occurring  Frequent- 
ly in  the  Coptic  New  Testament  ( Sahid - 
ic  Dialect),  compiled  by  Bruce  M. 
Metzger.  E.  J.  Brill,  Leiden,  1061.  Pp. 
24.  Old.  3-  ($.85). 

Good  word  lists  are  not  only  very  useful 
for  persons  who  wish  to  learn  a new  lan- 
guage as  rapidly  as  possible,  but  they  are  also 
of  great  value  to  teachers  and  especially  to 


70 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


scholars.  This  list  has  been  very  carefully 
prepared  by  a first-rate  specialist,  and  the 
reviewer  has  not  noted  a single  printer’s 
error  in  the  list  proper  (there  is  one  in  the 
title  of  the  brochure). 

The  importance  of  the  Coptic  language  has 
increased  greatly  in  recent  years.  Not  only 
did  the  1961  census  of  Egypt  establish  that 
the  number  of  Copts  is  close  to  6,400,000 — 
more  than  three  times  the  more  cautious  ear- 
lier estimates — but  there  is  now  a definite 
renaissance  of  religious  and  intellectual  cul- 
ture among  the  Copts,  in  spite  of  very  ad- 
verse conditions.  Even  more  important  to 
historians  is  the  fact  that  such  discoveries 
as  the  Manichaean  library  of  Faiyum  and 
the  early  Gnostic  library  of  Chenoboskion 
(Nag  Hammadi)  are  revolutionizing  our 
knowledge  of  the  history  of  religions.  The 
historian  of  Christianity,  as  well  as  the  stu- 
dent of  Hellenistic-Roman  and  Iranian  civili- 
zation must  now  learn  Coptic,  if  he  is  to 
control  his  field  properly.  Second  and  third- 
hand  information  is  never  good  enough  for 
a scientific  historian. 

As  a curiosity,  it  may  be  added  that  the 
reviewer  began  to  study  Coptic  because  of 
his  interest  in  the  vocalization  of  ancient 
Egyptian.  His  first  studies  go  back  to  1918, 
and  after  many  years  during  which  he  was 
practically  the  only  worker,  the  subject  has 
recently  been  taken  up  by  half  a dozen 
scholars  (including  T.  O.  Lambdin  in  this 
country),  with  very  remarkable  results.  The 
subject  is  not  purely  linguistic;  it  has  very 
important  historical  repercussions,  as  will 
appear  in  still  unpublished  studies  of  the  re- 
viewer. In  order  to  work  successfully  in  all 
these  fields  a knowledge  of  Coptic  is  indis- 
pensable. 

W.  F.  Albright 

JOHNS  HOPKINS  UNIVERSITY 
BALTIMORE,  MD. 

Eleusis  and  the  Eleusinian  Mysteries, 
by  George  E.  Mylonas.  Princeton 
University  Press,  Princeton,  N.T.,  1961. 
Pp.  346.  $8.50. 

For  over  thirty  years  Professor  Mylonas 
of  Washington  University,  St.  Louis,  has 
been  associated  with  the  work  of  excavation 
at  Eleusis,  a small  town  about  fourteen  miles 


west  of  Athens.  In  antiquity  from  Mycenaean 
to  Roman  times  there  stood  at  Eleusis  the 
world-famous  temple  of  Demeter.  During 
almost  two  millennia  pilgrims  from  all  over 
the  civilized  world  would  travel  to  this  cen- 
ter of  the  Demeter  cult  and  participate  in 
the  ritual  of  initiation,  the  details  of  which 
were  jealously  kept  secret  from  outsiders. 

Now  the  archaeologist’s  spade  has  un- 
earthed foundations  of  six  successive  temples, 
or  halls  of  initiation,  each  larger  than  the 
former.  In  the  process  of  expansion,  no  an- 
cient architect  dared  to  move  the  location  of 
the  inner  repository  (the  Anaktoron ) away 
from  the  ground  on  which  the  original  My- 
cenaean shrine  had  once  stood. 

The  cult  of  Demeter  at  Eleusis  was  general- 
ly regarded  as  the  most  elevating  and  noble 
of  the  several  competing  mystery  religions 
of  antiquity.  Even  Plato,  who  generally  spoke 
depreciatingly  of  such  cults,  had  only  praise 
when  referring  to  the  Eleusinian  mysteries. 
So  carefully  guarded  were  the  secret  rites 
of  initiation  into  the  cult  that  only  tantaliz- 
ingly  brief  comments  have  been  preserved  by 
ancient  writers.  The  only  literary  source  of 
any  considerable  extent  is  the  Hymn  to  De- 
meter, and  its  language  is  designedly  obscure 
and  indirect.  The  comments  in  the  Church 
Fathers  are,  without  exception,  adverse,  for 
they  regarded  the  competing  rituals  as  in- 
spired by  demons  in  order  to  confuse  weak 
Christians. 

In  the  book  under  review,  Professor  My- 
lonas describes  the  early  history  and  archaeo- 
logical remains  at  Eleusis.  He  takes  the 
reader  on  a guided  tour  of  the  Museum  which 
houses  many  of  the  artifacts  discovered  at 
the  site  of  the  temple.  The  plates  depicting 
the  more  important  statues  and  other  ob- 
jects are  remarkably  clear.  A large  part  of 
the  book  surveys  the  scanty  and  scattered 
literary  references  to  the  Eleusinian  mys- 
teries. Here  Mylonas  shows  a salutary  rigor 
in  questioning  many  opinions  which  have 
been  held  by  previous  scholars  on  the  basis 
of  insufficient  evidence.  For  example,  he  is 
unwilling  to  agree  with  the  widely  held  view 
that  the  drama  of  a sacred  marriage  ( liieros 
gatnos ) was  enacted  as  part  of  the  initiatory 
rites.  Furthermore,  Mylonas  questions  the 
legitimacy  of  the  conjectural  emendation  of 
a statement  made  by  Clement  of  Alexandria 
which  forms  the  basis  of  the  view  that  a 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


7 1 


sacramental  meal  was  part  of  the  rites  of 
initiation.  (It  will  be  recalled  that  Professor 
Percy  Gardner  had  thrown  out  the  suggestion 
that  the  Apostle  Paul,  having  stopped  off  at 
Eleusis,  was  so  much  intrigued  by  the  pos- 
sibilities of  a sacred  meal  of  communion  with 
one  another  and  with  the  Deity,  that  he 
henceforth  introduced  such  a ceremony  into 
the  primitive  church.)  The  net  result  of  My- 
lonas’s  book  is  not  only  to  strengthen  and 
enlarge  what  can  be  deduced  from  the  archae- 
ological remains,  but  to  question  and,  in  part, 
to  reduce  the  area  of  “assured  results”  based 
on  the  literary  analysis  of  ambiguous  and 
fragmentary  testimonies. 

All  in  all,  this  is  a significant  contribution 
to  a subject  which  has  fascinated  hundreds  of 
modern  scholars. 

Bruce  M.  Metzger 

The  Epistles  to  the  Romans  and 
Thessalonians.  (Calvin’s  New  Testa- 
ment Commentaries,  Vol.  8).  Trans,  by 
R.  Mackenzie.  Wm.  Eerdmans,  Grand 
Rapids,  Mich.,  1962.  Pp.  433.  $6.00. 

This  new  translation  is  undoubtedly  more 
fluent  than  that  of  the  older  Edinburgh  se- 
ries and,  all  in  all,  the  translator  has  made  a 
creditable  job.  Yet  a greater  accuracy  in  the 
detail  still  is  desirable,  in  order  that  the 
readers  may  be  led,  as  it  were,  by  the  hand, 
into  the  intimate  knowledge  of  what  Calvin 
used  to  call  his  “procedure.”  Here  are  a few 
examples : “The  definition  of  his  analogy,” 
analogiae  definitio,  is  vague;  definitio  is  a 
technical  term,  which  could  be  rendered  best 
by  “resolution”  (p.  127).  “A  distinction  be- 
tween depraved  lusts  which  secure  our  con- 
sent, and  concupiscence  which  tempts  and 
affects  our  hearts  in  such  a way  that  it  stops 
in  the  midst  of  urging  us  to  sin”  is  verbose 
and  weak;  Calvin  speaks  of  those  evil  de- 
sires which  “go  as  far  as  consent,”  quae  ad 
consensum  usque  perveniunt,  and  of  such  con- 
cupiscence as  “tickles  and  affects  our  hearts, 
yet  stops  in  the  midst  of  urging  us,”  quae  sic 
corda  titillat  et  afficit,  ut  in  medio  impulsu 
subsistat  (p.  143).  “Free  will”  is  used  either 
as  a translation  of  the  technical  liberum  arbi- 
trium — I really  cannot  think  of  a suitable 
English  equivalent ; but  then  a footnote  would 
be  in  order — or  for  rendering  the  adverb 


sponte,  as  for  instance  on  page  163,  “there 
are  good  motions  within  us  by  which  we  are 
prepared  of  our  own  free  will” ; in  this  last 
instance,  the  reader  will  not  realize  that  these 
“preparations”  are  an  important  item  in  the 
vocabulary  of  the  Roman  Catholic  theologians 
and  polemists,  which  was  officially  adopted 
by  the  Council  of  Trent  in  its  decree  on  Jus- 
tification. Here,  again,  why  not  a footnote? 
Pp.  416,  417:  “and  not  after  the  tradition,” 
is  the  lesson  of  the  King  James  version,  cor- 
responding to  Vulg. : iuxta  traditionem,  and 
to  the  Greek : Kara  ryv  irapabotriv.  Calvin 
writes : iuxta  institutionem,  a word  of  which 
he  is  particularly  fond,  in  the  sense  of  “teach- 
ing,” “instruction,”  the  equivalent  of  the 
Greek  SiSaxv.  This  leads  me  to  a general 
remark:  it  might  have  been  a good  idea  to 
translate  the  Biblical  text  as  Calvin  has  it, 
rather  than  to  give  the  King  James  instead, 
for  the  latter  is  misleading,  and  sometime 
causes  the  commentary  to  appear  irrelevant 
or  even  unintelligible.  The  editors  of  the 
Corpus  Reformatorum  had  been  careful  to  use 
different  types  to  show  those  passages  which 
had  been  added  to  the  1539  text  in  subse- 
quent editions.  But  the  general  format  of  the 
new  series  excludes  such  typographical  de- 
vices as  well  as  footnotes,  and  this  is  most 
regrettable,  since  what  is  planned  as  a “popu- 
lar” edition  would  have  become  useful  also 
for  scholarly  purposes,  at  a very  small  addi- 
tional cost. 

Georges  A.  Barrois 

Concordance  to  the  Distinctive  Greek 
Text  of  Codex  Bezae,  compiled  by 
James  D.  Yoder.  (=Vol.  II  of  New 
Testament  Tools  and  Studies,  edited 
by  Bruce  M.  Metzger.)  E.  J.  Brill, 
Leiden,  and  Wm.  B.  Eerdmans,  Grand 
Rapids,  Mich.,  1961.  Pp.  vi  -f-  74 ■ $5.00. 

The  codex  Bezae  (known  officially  as  D 
or  05),  named  after  its  former  owner,  the 
French  Calvinist,  Theodore  Beza,  is  a Greek- 
Latin  manuscript  of  the  Four  Gospels  and 
Acts  dating  from  the  fifth  (sixth)  century 
and  is  of  great  importance  for  the  study  of 
the  textual  history  of  the  New  Testament. 
According  to  one  rumor  it  spent  the  period 
of  the  World  War  II  (1939-1945)  at  the 
bottom  of  a college  well,  but  it  is  now  again 


72 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


on  view  in  the  Cambridge  (England)  Uni- 
versity Library,  which  has  been  its  home 
since  1581.  It  may  be  described  as  a “prob- 
lem-child” which  demands  an  answer  to  these 
questions  and  many  more  besides.  What  is 
the  relationship  of  its  Greek  and  Latin  sides? 
Neither  is  a direct  translation  of  the  other. 
Why  does  it  make  additions  to  and  para- 
phrases of  the  text?  Why  does  it  indulge  in 
fancy  spellings  and  word  formations?  What 
is  its  relationship  to  the  Syriac  tradition? 
What  connection  has  it  with  heresy  and  su- 
perstitious divination?  (see  the  studies  of 
Rendel  Harris).  What  significance  have  the 
activities  of  the  twenty  odd  correctors  who, 
according  to  Scrivener,  worked  on  the  manu- 
script at  various  periods? 

By  reason  of  its  vagaries  D has  produced 
a collection  of  language  forms  of  its  own 
not  listed  in  the  standard  concordances  of 
Moulton  and  Geden  or  of  Bruder  and  so  are 
in  danger  of  being  overlooked  in  study.  Some 
of  these  are  referred  to  in  Arndt  and  Ging- 
rich’s Greek-English  Lexicon,  but  it  is  use- 
ful to  have  this  record  of  all  of  them  which 
Professor  Yoder  has  produced  and  has  used 
as  the  basis  of  his  unpublished  Th.D.  dis- 
sertation, “The  Language  of  the  Greek  Vari- 
ants of  Codex  Bezae  Cantabrigiensis,”  1958. 

The  term  “ ‘distinctive  Greek  text’  covers 
those  words  in  Bezae  that  are  not  present  in 
the  corresponding  text  of  Westcott  and  Hort’s 
edition  of  the  Greek  New  Testament”  (1881). 
The  definite  article  is  excluded  and,  follow- 
ing Moulton  and  Geden,  the  evidence  for  54 
and  Kal  is  given  in  summary.  Such  a detailed 
volume  has  to  be  used  over  a period  before 
it  can  be  properly  judged,  but  a spot-check 
at  various  points  suggests  a high  degree  of 
accuracy  in  the  compilation  and  proof-read- 
ing. 

A book  like  this  is  not  without  value  to  the 
Biblical  student  with  Greek  or  to  the  pastor 
in  quest  of  a text.  Perhaps  instead  of  re- 
churning the  commentators  he  would  find  it 
useful  to  look  at  some  of  the  words  here  and 
think  of  the  story  behind  their  appearance. 
For  example,  the  drjSt'a  which  describes  the 
relationship  of  Pilate  and  Herod  (Lk  23:12) 
is  not  unknown  in  our  midst  today.  The  rare 
d\\o«5w  of  Lk  9:29  used  of  our  Lord’s  face 
at  the  Transfiguration  has  a link  with  the 
Greek  text  of  Daniel.  D’s  form  of  Iscariot 
(dn-A  Kapvurov)  has  given  rise  to  several 


theories  as  to  the  meaning  of  this  name. 
k \4ppa  at  Mk  7 :2i  we  meet  otherwise  only 
at  Rev.  9:21.  The  wape/cros  of  Mt  19:9  shows 
another  of  the  many  cases  where  a scribe  has 
been  influenced  by  the  parallel  passage  in 
5 132.  In  the  rather  unusual  irenn-Taios  of 
Ac  20:6  (after  5 days)  the  scribe  manages 
to  make  one  word  do  the  work  of  three  of 
the  ordinary  Greek  text  or  the  English.  At 
Ac  22  :26  D makes  a third  reference  to  em- 
phasise the  importance  of  Paul’s  Roman 
citizenship.  Unusual  proper  name  forms  are 
listed  on  the  final  page  and  perhaps  a closer 
study  of  these  might  tell  us  more  of  where 
D was  written. 

All  in  all  this  book  is  no  mere  dry  list, 
but,  if  treated  imaginatively  with  a New 
Testament  at  hand,  it  could  readily  be  a 
working  introduction  for  anyone  who  wants 
to  study  Codex  Bezae’s  special  phenomena. 
Why  not  begin  now  in  a field  where  facts 
count  for  more  than  fancy? 

Ian  A.  Moir 

NEW  COLLEGE 

UNIVERSITY  OF  EDINBURGH 

HISTORY 

On  the  Road  to  Christian  Unity,  by 
Samuel  McCrea  Cavert,  Harper  and 
Brothers,  New  York,  1961.  Pp.  192. 
$3-75- 

The  Ecumenical  Movement:  What 
It  Is  and  What  It  Does,  by  Norman 
Goodall,  Oxford  University  Press,  New 
York,  1961.  Pp.  240.  $4.50. 

One  Great  Ground  of  Hope:  Chris- 
tian Missions  and  Christian  Unity,  by 
Henry  P.  Van  Dusen,  The  Westminster 
Press,  Phila.,  1961.  Pp.  205.  $3.95. 

It  may  be  simply  a coincidence,  but  if  so 
it  is  surely  a happy  one,  that  three  books 
on  the  Ecumenical  Movement  should  have 
appeared  in  1961,  the  year  in  which  that 
movement  at  the  General  Assembly  of  the 
World  Council  at  New  Delhi,  achieved  a 
signal  degree  of  unification  at  the  world  level 
through  the  merger  of  the  International  Mis- 
sionary Council  with  the  World  Council  of 
Churches. 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


73 


The  three  authors  have  for  years  been 
closely  identified  with  the  Movement.  Dr. 
Cavert,  after  long  service  as  Secretary  of  the 
Federal  Council  of  Churches,  and  then  of 
its  successor,  the  National  Council  of  Church- 
es, from  1954  to  1957  was  Executive  Secre- 
tary in  the  United  States  for  the  World 
Council  of  Churches.  Dr.  Goodall  has  been 
Secretary  of  the  International  Missionary 
1 Council  since  1944,  and  Secretary  of  the 
Joint  Committee  of  the  World  Council  of 
Churches  and  the  International  Missionary 
Council,  since  1946.  Dr.  Van  Dusen,  though 
not  a full-time  official  of  the  Movement,  has 
attended  every  major  ecumenical  conference 
during  the  past  crucial  quarter  century ; and 
since  1954  he  has  served  as  Chairman  of  the 
Joint  Committee  of  the  World  Council  of 
Churches  and  the  International  Missionary 
Council,  in  this  capacity  playing  a key  role 
in  the  recently-consummated  merger  of  these 
two  world  Christian  organizations.  So  all 
three  authors  write  both  out  of  inside  knowl- 
1 edge  of  the  Movement  and  with  a deep  con- 
cern for  its  increasing  usefulness  in  the  cause 
of  Jesus  Christ  throughout  the  world. 

As  was  only  to  be  expected,  each  author 
has  his  own  individual  approach  and  em- 
phasis. Dr.  Van  Dusen  emphasizes  the  mis- 
sionary origins  of  the  Movement,  presents  a 
careful  analysis  of  the  various  forms  which 
Christian  reunion  has  taken  and  lays  stress 
on  the  problems  concerning  the  Movement  as 
it  faces  the  future.  Dr.  Cavert  pays  particu- 
lar attention  to  those  Christian  groups,  Prot- 
estant, Eastern  Orthodox  and  Roman  Catho- 
lic, which  do  not  cooperate  in  the  work  of 
the  Movement,  and  seeks  to  explain  the  rea- 
sons for  this  non-cooperation.  Dr.  Goodall, 
while  of  course  not  ignoring  the  questions 
with  which  these  other  authors  deal,  devotes 
much  space  to  the  history  of  the  Movement 
and  to  its  various  organizational  structures 
— i.e.,  to  what  it  does  as  well  as  what  it  is. 
Despite  such  differences  of  viewpoint  and 
emphasis,  however,  all  three  authors  deal 
with  the  Ecumenical  Movement  in  the  same 
general  way.  They  all  give  an  outline  of  its 
history  during  the  past  half  century,  emphasiz- 
ing the  World  Missionary  Council  at  Edin- 
burgh in  1910  as  an  important  milestone, 
and  pointing  to  the  three-fold  strand — the 
organization  of  the  International  Missionary 
Council,  the  Faith  and  Order  Movement,  and 


the  Life  and  Work  Movement — which  finally 
merged  in  the  World  Council  of  Churches  as 
it  exists  today. 

Secondly,  they  all  deal  in  some  detail  with 
the  question  of  the  Movement’s  goal — i.e., 
the  kind  of  Christian  unity  which  it  seeks  to 
bring  into  existence.  On  this  matter  there  is 
no  officially  announced  policy;  but  Dr.  Van 
Dusen  makes  some  valuable  concrete  sug- 
gestions concerning  it. 

Thirdly,  all  three  authors  concern  them- 
selves with  the  major  problems  which  con- 
front the  Ecumenical  Movement  at  present, 
and  which  seem  likely  to  continue  to  plague 
it  in  the  immediate  future.  There  is,  for  ex- 
ample, the  question  of  the  relation  of  non- 
cooperating church  groups  to  the  main  move- 
ment. Secondly,  there  is  the  question  of  the 
Movement’s  leadership — what  Dr.  Van  Dusen 
describes  as  “problems  implicit  in  the  trans- 
fer of  leadership  from  the  persons  who  so 
largely  guided  the  destinies  of  the  Movement 
in  the  days  of  its  projection  and  early  de- 
velopment, to  those  officially  designated  by 
the  member  churches  for  its  direction”  (p. 
102).  Again,  there  is  the  question  of  the  role 
of  councils  of  churches — local,  national,  in- 
ternational— within  ecumenical  Christianity. 
Once  more,  there  is  the  question  of  the  re- 
lation of  world  confessionalism,  which  has 
experienced  such  a resurgence  in  the  past 
half  century,  to  the  interdenominational  world 
Movement,  represented  by  the  World  Coun- 
cil of  Churches.  And  finally,  but  by  no  means 
least  important,  there  is  the  grave  and  con- 
tinuing problem  of  establishing  adequate  grass 
roots  for  this  world  Movement  of  Christian 
unity  at  the  local  congregational  level,  where 
to  many  church  members  the  word  ecumeni- 
cal, with  all  that  it  implies,  means  little  or 
nothing. 

These  three  books  are  clearly  and  inter- 
estingly written,  and  therefore  are  eminently 
readable.  Among  them  they  present  a well- 
rounded  account  of  the  origins,  nature,  pres- 
ent status  and  future  prospects  of  that  Move- 
ment of  Christian  unity  which  is  one  of  the 
most  striking  developments  in  the  recent  his- 
tory of  non-Roman  Catholic  Christianity. 

Norman  V.  Hope 

Freedom  and  Catholic  Power  in 
Spain  and  Portugal,  by  Paul  Blanshard. 


74 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


Beacon  Press,  Boston,  Mass.,  1962.  Pp. 
300.  $3.95. 

This  is  an  analysis  by  Paul  Blanshard — 
the  well-known  author  of  American  Freedom 
and  Catholic  Power — of  the  systems  of  gov- 
ernment prevailing  in  the  Iberian  Peninsular 
countries  of  Spain  and  Portugal.  It  is  per- 
fectly true,  as  the  author  is  careful  to  note, 
that  these  two  governments  differ  some- 
what from  each  other.  For  example,  in  Por- 
tugal but  not  in  Spain,  there  is  a legal  sepa- 
ration between  Church  and  State,  which 
means  that  in  Portugal  “the  homeland  con- 
gregations must  raise  most  of  the  money  for 
their  own  priests”  (p.  221).  The  Roman 
Catholic  Church,  which  claims  a nominal 
membership  of  90  per  cent  of  the  Portuguese 
people,  enjoys  special  privileges;  but  minority 
religious  groups,  such  as  Jews  and  Protes- 
tants, have  greater  freedom  under  Salazar 
in  Portugal  than  under  Franco  in  Spain.  In 
spite  of  such  differences,  however,  both 
governments  represent  what  Mr.  Blanshard 
rightly  calls  “clerical  fascism.”  That  is  to 
say,  in  both  Spain  and  Portugal  a dictatorial 
government,  in  alliance  with  the  Roman 
Catholic  Church,  has  silenced  and  outlawed 
all  political  opposition  by  main  force.  It  has 
imposed  a strict  censorship  over  all  mass 
media  of  communication,  such  as  the  press, 
the  radio,  and  even  books.  In  the  economic 
realm,  a paternalistic  capitalism  has  outlawed 
strikes,  and  denied  the  workers  the  right  of 
free  organization,  even  though  it  has  also  con- 
ferred on  them  some  social  benefits,  such  as 
health  services,  family  allowances  and  old 
age  pensions.  In  short,  both  Spain  and  Por- 
tugal have  many  of  the  earmarks  of  police 
states. 

Mr.  Blanshard  does  not  fail  to  note  that 
both  Iberian  dictatorships,  though  accepted 
resignedly  by  the  citizenry,  have  run  into 
trouble  during  recent  years.  For  example, 
Portugal  has  had  Goa  forcibly  annexed  by 
the  Indian  government;  and  riots  and  other 
disturbances  have  broken  out  in  Angola,  one 
of  Portugal’s  chief  African  colonies.  Spain 
has  recently  experienced  a wave  of  strikes, 
some  of  which  have  enjoyed  the  backing  even 
of  certain  members  of  the  Roman  Catholic 
hierarchy.  So  it  may  be  that  time  is  running 
out  for  the  two  aging  dictators  of  Spain  and 
Portugal. 


Mr.  Blanshard  is  interested  in  exposing  the 
facts  about  these  Iberian  governments,  not 
merely  as  a reporter,  but  also  as  an  Ameri- 
can. For,  as  he  rightly  points  out,  freedom, 
like  peace,  is  indivisible ; and  therefore,  “in 
this  troubled  and  interdependent  world  no 
suppression  of  human  freedom  is  irrelevant 
to  our  own  future”  (p.  1).  But  more  than 
that,  American  money,  with  the  full  approval 
of  the  American  Roman  Catholic  press,  has 
gone  to  shore  up  Franco’s  dictatorship,  in 
payment  for  the  right  to  build  air  bases  in 
Spain.  Whatever  value  these  bases  may  have 
from  a military  point  of  view,  there  is  little 
doubt  that  this  alliance  of  America  with  Fran- 
co has  gravely  blurred  its  image  as  a friend 
of  democracy,  and  a foe  of  dictatorship.  And 
it  may  well  be  that,  because  of  present  Ameri- 
can support  for  Franco,  the  Spanish  govern- 
ment which  succeeds  him  will  not  be  as  friend- 
ly to  the  western  democracies  as  the  United 
States  would  like. 

Some  reviewers  have  disagreed  with  Mr. 
Blanshard’s  suggestion  that  the  United  States 
should  end  its  ties  with  Franco  at  the  ear- 
liest possible  moment.  Others  have  claimed 
that  he  has  not  done  adequate  justice  to  cer- 
tain improvements  in  Spain,  such  as  higher 
living  standards  and  some  relaxation  of  po- 
lice rule.  But  it  can  be  confidently  asserted 
that  he  has  presented  such  a well  documented 
and  objective  account  of  the  two  dictatorships 
that  his  book  will  be  banned  by  their  censors. 
This  is  an  additional  reason  why  it  should 
be  widely  read  in  the  United  States  of 
America. 

Norman  V.  Hope 

The  Protestant  Search  for  Political 
Realism,  1919-1941,  by  Donald  B.  Mey- 
er. University  of  California  Press,  Ber- 
keley and  Los  Angeles,  i960.  Pp.  482. 
$6.75. 

The  Protestant  quest  for  social  justice  in 
the  United  States  has  been  perennial.  At- 
tempts to  understand  this  quest  in  the  twen- 
tieth century  are  comparatively  new  and 
fresh.  Recently,  Paul  Carter  in  The  Decline 
and  Revival  of  the  Social  Gospel,  1920-1940, 
and  Robert  M.  Miller  in  American  Protes- 
tantism and  Social  Issues,  1919-1939,  have 
attempted  to  write  histories  of  the  period 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


75 


dated  by  the  passing  of  Walter  Rauschen- 
busch  and  the  rise  to  influence  of  Reinhold 
Niebuhr.  Both  of  these  social  historians  were 
interested  in  the  organized  aspects  of  the 
quest  and  stressed  analysis  of  the  denomi- 
national and  ecumenical  pronouncements  of 
Protestant  groups. 

Donald  B.  Meyer,  Associate  Professor  of 
History  at  the  University  of  California,  Los 
Angeles,  supplements,  indeed,  makes  up  for 
certain  deficiencies,  in  the  work  of  Carter 
and  Miller.  Meyer  attempts  an  analysis  in 
depth.  His  study  is  polarized  around  Walter 
Rauschenbusch  and  Reinhold  Niebuhr.  All 
other  individuals  and  organizations  are 
drawn,  and  sometimes  quartered,  in  relation 
to  these  figures. 

The  so-called  “social  gospel”  movement 
was  the  climax  of  the  Protestant  “religion 
of  will,”  according  to  Meyer.  While  it  was 
colored  by  the  liberal  theological  ferment 
of  the  post-civil  war  period  it  was  essen- 
tially the  last  effort  of  evangelical  Protestant- 
ism to  embrace  within  its  concern  society  as 
a whole.  In  criticizing  Rauschenbusch,  Mey- 
er maintains  that  he  “failed  to  defend  a cen- 
ter of  religious  meaning  prior  to,  in  some 
sense  independent  of,  social  salvation,  from 
invasion  by  society  and  the  political.”  He 
failed  largely  because  he  did  not  define  per- 
sonal salvation  in  such  a way  as  to  include 
the  proper  relation  between  man  and  other 
men.  Rauschenbusch  believed  that  the  “flow 
of  force”  would  all  be  in  one  direction,  “from 
the  centers  of  prior  salvation  outward.”  Con- 
sequently, in  claiming  that  the  Christianizing 
of  the  social  order  was  as  possible  as  the 
Christianizing  of  the  individual,  he  tended 
to  equate  the  Christianization  of  the  social 
order,  the  coming  of  the  Kingdom  of  God, 
with  the  Christianizing  of  the  soul.  But  he 
still  left  the  individual,  “with  his  inner  unity 
and  composure,  his  sense  of  meaning  and 
integrity,”  exposed  to  the  power  structures 
and  struggles  of  society.  After  dealing  with 
the  tendency  to  the  absolutize  reason  and 
love  in  Harry  Ward  and  Kirby  Page,  Meyer 
concludes  his  summary  of  the  social  gospel. 
It  must  be  criticized,  not  because  of  its  social 
vision  or  its  political  naivete,  but  because  of 
its  view  of  “the  sanctified  man,  the  good 
man,  the  moral  man  who  would  moralize 
immoral  society.” 

Then  came  Reinhold  Niebuhr,  fresh  from 


his  exposure  to  the  Ford  revolution  in  De- 
troit, to  expose  Americans  to  neo-orthodoxy. 
Niebuhr  saw  man’s  problem  as  older  than 
that  of  industrialization.  The  problem  is  as 
old  as  man  himself ; man  is  a sinner.  The 
Renaissance  was  right  in  asserting  man’s 
transcendence  and  freedom,  but  wrong  in  as- 
serting confidently  and  optimistically  the  way 
in  which  man  manifests  these  attributes.  The 
Reformation  was  right  in  insisting  upon 
humility  as  the  check  upon  pretension,  re- 
pentance as  the  center  of  humility,  to  recog- 
nize the  evil  within  oneself  before  the  evil 
outside.  The  fruit  of  humility  is  the  capacity 
to  forgive ; its  support  is  a true  knowledge 
of  God  possessed  by  grace,  not  by  right.  And 
grace  cannot  be  accumulated  in  history.  In 
relating  all  this  to  his  discussion  of  social 
problems  Niebuhr  maintained  that  justice  did 
not  have  to  wait  upon  the  prior  salvation  of 
all  men  or  righteousness  within  man.  While 
love  may  be  the  impossible  possibility,  it  can 
be  approximated  only  between  individuals. 
Love  gives  the  direction  to  justice,  however, 
which  remains  the  potential  possibility  in 
any  given  situation  arising  among  men.  In 
the  service  of  justice,  power,  whether  rep- 
resented by  capital,  labor,  or  the  church,  has 
to  be  balanced  by  power.  Thus  man  will  be 
saved  from  the  depersonalization  of  an  “au- 
tomatic process”  compounded  by  an  “auto- 
cratic management”  often  supported  by  “ab- 
stractions of  society.”  Meyer  suggests  Nie- 
buhr’s crisis  came  before  and  during  the 
Second  World  War  when  he  waited  for  re- 
pentance. Lost  to  perfection,  open  to  prag- 
matic dealings,  he  had  little  concrete  and 
familiar  to  offer  to  his  fellow  Americans  to 
fight  for  or  to  work  toward  after  the  war. 
According  to  Meyer,  the  neo-liberals  in- 
fluenced by  neo-orthodoxy — Walter  Horton, 
Henry  Pitt  Van  Dusen,  Robert  Calhoun, 
John  Bennett — tried  to  moderate  between 
Niebuhr  and  his  fellow  Americans.  Paul  Til- 
lich added  a cultural  dimension  to  relieve  the 
preoccupation  with  the  political. 

Meyer  observes  quite  perceptively — but  all 
too  briefly — that  neither  Rauschenbusch  nor 
Niebuhr,  until  recently,  developed  any  help- 
ful ecclesiology.  However,  the  Church  is  not 
the  brotherhood  transcending  and  softening 
all  human  divisions,  as  among  chastened  lib- 
erals. The  Church  is  sacramental,  according 
to  Niebuhr,  pointing  to  a center  and  ground 


76 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


of  meaning  that  is  not  in  itself,  in  which  it 
shares  but  which  it  does  not  possess.  Founded 
on  need  and  shaped  in  repentance,  it  is  the 
human  society  which  understands  that  no 
society  can  realize  brotherhood,  even  the 
church.  “Every  society,”  according  to  Mey- 
er’s interpretation,  “lives  under,  not  toward, 
the  kingdom  of  God.”  It  is  in  the  Church 
that  a man  may  wait  upon  God.  Meyer  cred- 
its Niebuhr  with  reviving  a new  self-con- 
sciousness within  Protestantism  and  with  its 
increasing  willingness  to  carry  “great  respon- 
sibilities without  great  expectations.” 

This  is  the  book  about  the  “social  passion” 
to  buy  and  to  read.  To  be  sure,  it  directs 
the  student  to  a more  careful  consideration 
of  the  books  by  Miller  and  Carter  which 
have  to  do  with  the  Church.  But  it  raises  its 
questions  in  a far  more  suggestive  manner 
than  do  other  writers.  Meyer’s  style  is  some- 
what involved;  but  it  is  helpfully  allusive. 
Meyer’s  conceptions  are  not  always  clear, 
such  as,  his  analysis  of  the  who’s  who  and 
what’s  what  of  neo-orthodoxy,  the  Christian’s 
relation  to  the  Church  and  the  kingdom  of 
God,  and  the  way  by  which  Niebuhr  protects 
the  individual  who  seeks  after  justice  in  con- 
stant struggle  any  better  than  did  early  “so- 
cial gospellers.”  Meyer’s  analysis  never  fails 
to  stimulate.  He  is  very  much  concerned  with 
the  upsurge  of  what  he  calls  “economic  fun- 
damentalism,” e.g.,  Christian  Economics, 
which  equates  Christianity  with  laissez-faire. 
And  well  he  might  be ! But  he  might  have 
expressed  more  interest  in  those  men  who 
represent  a Niebuhrian  harvest,  who  have 
accepted  his  political  insights  and  who  are 
now  in  power  in  Washington,  e.g.,  Arthur 
Schlesinger,  Jr.,  for  whom  this  book  was 
written  as  a doctoral  dissertation.  How  do 
these  men  understand  “grace”  which  is  “be- 
yond security,  beyond  morality,  beyond  trag- 
edy,” and  which  is  basis  for  the  patient  bear- 
ing of  sustained  political  responsibility? 
Where  and  how  do  these  men  wait  upon 
God? 

James  H.  Smylie 

The  Christians  of  Korea,  by  Samuel 
H.  Moffett.  Friendship  Press,  New 
York,  1962.  Pp.  174.  $2.95. 

From  the  very  beginning  the  establish- 
ment and  growth  of  the  Christian  church  in 


Korea  has  been  one  of  the  wonders  of  the 
modern  missionary  movement.  The  seventy- 
fifth  anniversary  of  the  founding  of  the  church 
in  Korea  has  recently  passed,  and  there  are 
more  Christians  in  that  little  country  than 
there  were  in  the  world  at  the  end  of  the  first 
century  of  the  Christian  era! 

Of  late  years  divisions  within  the  church 
have  been  a cause  of  great  sorrow,  but  one 
finishes  the  present  small  volume  with  a sense 
of  gratitude  to  God  for  the  accomplishments 
of  the  Gospel  in  Korea,  which  are  nothing 
short  of  being  marvelous.  We  feel  that  even 
more  might  have  been  made,  in  this  review, 
of  the  conversion  of  thousands  of  prisoners 
behind  barbed  wire,  who  accepted  Christ  even 
though  they  had  been  indoctrinated  with  all 
that  Communism  had  to  give. 

This  book  is  written  in  a most  attractive 
style  and  is  filled  with  statistics  which  rep- 
resent up-to-date  research  by  an  expert. 
Samuel  Moffett  was  born  in  Korea  and  his 
father  was  one  of  the  great  founders  of  mis- 
sion work  in  that  “Hermit  Kingdom.”  Many 
people  know  the  author  from  his  former  book, 
Where’re  the  Sun,  which  has  been  one  of  the 
most  popular  volumes  published  by  Friend- 
ship Press.  The  book  under  review  has  a 
number  of  excellent  illustrations  and  a book 
bibliography.  It  is  one  of  the  textbooks  to  be 
used  by  the  churches  in  the  general  mission 
study  for  this  year  on  East  Asia. 

The  author  is  remarkable  in  his  selection 
of  the  salient  facts  of  the  Christian  movement 
and  combines  them  with  information  about 
the  country  and  the  results  of  the  tragic  war 
years,  to  give  us  a vivid  picture  with  high 
lights  and  deep  shadows.  This  is  certainly 
a splendid  book  for  group  study  and  should 
be  read  carefully  by  every  pastor  and  mis- 
sion leader. 

J.  Christy  Wilson 

PRACTICAL 

The  Search  for  Meaning,  by  A.  J. 
Ungersma.  Westminster  Press,  Phila., 
1961.  Pp.  188.  $4.75. 

The  Professor  of  Pastoral  Theology  of  San 
Francisco  Theological  Seminary  has  given 
us  a sympathetic  and  informing  summary  of 
the  existential  analysis  and  logotherapy  of 
Dr.  Victor  E.  Frankl  of  Vienna.  Not  only 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


77 


is  Ungersma  well-trained  for  the  task,  but 
he  went  to  Vienna  to  gain  an  insight  into 
the  theory  and  practice  of  one  of  the  most 
interesting  and  controversial  psychiatrists  of 
our  time.  The  result  of  Ungersma’s  study  is 
warmly  favorable ; it  is  also  a welcome  intro- 
duction to  logotherapy  based  upon  Frankl’s 
position  that  the  main  drive  in  human  life  is 
the  “will  to  meaning.” 

Frankl  does  not  repudiate  the  Freudian 
method,  but  he  does  believe  that  the  “will 
to  pleasure”  is  secondary  to  the  “will  to 
meaning.”  Frankl  bases  his  theory  upon  sci- 
entific study,  clinical  practice  and  his  own 
bitter  experience  in  a concentration  camp. 
Over  against  the  naturalistic  interpretation 
of  much  psychotherapy,  Ungersma  describes 
Frankl’s  concern  for  the  growth  of  meaning 
in  life  as  well  as  the  person’s  realization  of 
values  and  the  will  to  act  responsibly.  Un- 
gersma seeks  to  relate  all  this  to  Reinhold 
Niebuhr’s,  Nature  and  Destiny  of  Man,  and 
Pitrim  Sorokin’s  studies  in  sensate  culture. 

This  book  is  significant  for  the  Christian 
since  it  uses  the  term  “logos”  to  describe 
the  existential  core  of  human  life.  It  seeks 
to  bridge  the  chasm  between  religion  and 
psychiatry.  It  claims  that  the  deepest  need 
of  man  is  for  a meaning  which  will  create 
initiative  and  responsible  action. 

Logotherapy  may  also  be  welcomed  by  some 
psychoanalysts  because  it  goes  beyond  the 
pragmatic  approach  to  human  problems.  It 
seems  to  fill  a human  need.  The  removal  of 
problems  is  one  thing;  the  engendering  of 
some  will  to  meaning  to  fill  the  vacuum  is  an- 
other. 

On  the  other  hand,  there  are  psycho- 
analysts who  will  regard  logotherapy  as 
unscientific,  and  as  the  introduction  into  analy- 
sis of  a theological  factor  which  is  quite  ex- 
traneous, and  even  dangerous.  And  there  are 
theologians  who  will  regard  Frankl  as  the 
champion  of  a rather  hazy  theology  which 
is  lacking  in  a definitive  of  the  meaning  of 
Frankl’s  “meaning” ! 

However,  it  must  be  admitted  that  Frankl 
is  having  success  in  his  therapy.  And  above 
all,  he  is  causing  some  serious  thought  among 
psychiatrists  and  religionists  as  to  the  “chief 
end  of  man”  and  hence  the  crucial  task  of 
those  who  deal  with  man. 

E.  G.  Homrighausen 


Doctor  Songster,  by  Paul  Sangster. 
Epworth  Press,  London,  1962.  Pp.  372. 
25s. 

Biographies  of  great  preachers  are  rare 
these  days  and  none  of  us  can  determine 
whether  this  is  due  to  a scarcity  of  great 
pulpit  men  or  of  skilful  biographers.  In  an 
age  when  secretarial  help,  press  releases, 
and  carefully  noted  itineraries  are  the  com- 
mon blessing  and  advantage  of  outstanding 
churchmen,  it  is  unfortunate  that  so  few 
stirring  biographies  are  written  and  that  we 
lack  great  contemporary  portraits  such  as 
those  once  given  to  us  by  Adamson,  Barbour, 
Porritt,  and  Allen. 

Before  Will  Sangster  died  he  entrusted  his 
son,  Paul,  with  the  responsibility  of  telling 
his  story  for  posterity.  He  left  chapter  head- 
ings and  copious  notes,  but  the  major  job  still 
remained  and  what  we  get  is  happily  not  a 
sentimental  paean  of  filial  devotion,  but  a 
sober  and  objective  assessment  that  does 
honor  to  one  of  the  greatest  figures  in  Brit- 
ish Methodism  in  this  generation. 

When  the  story  of  Methodism  in  Britain 
from  1930  to  i960  is  written  down,  three 
figures  will  stand  out  for  reasons  peculiarly 
each  own : Leslie  D.  Weatherhead,  William 
E.  Sangster,  and  Donald  Soper.  Sangster’s 
career  was  cut  off  prematurely — he  was  only 
sixty  when  he  died — but  into  those  years  was 
crammed  a career  of  growth,  development,  and 
service  to  his  denomination  that  make  him 
easily  primus  inter  pares.  Coming  out  of  a 
family  of  splendid  spiritual  devotion  with  an 
early  acquaintance  with  the  Christian  faith 
in  the  Radnor  Mission,  blessed  with  a keen 
mind  and  an  abundance  of  natural  gifts  as 
a preacher,  executive,  and  prophetic  leader, 
the  record  of  his  life  as  set  down  by  his  son 
is  an  inspiration  to  younger  men,  a joyful 
memory  to  his  family,  and  a contribution 
without  equal  to  the  life  of  Protestantism  in 
post-war  Britain.  He  was  a rare  combina- 
tion of  discipline  and  devotion  which  made 
him  an  attractive  preacher  for  consistent  con- 
gregations of  3,000  in  Westminster  Hall, 
London,  and  a churchman  who  served  in  many 
responsible  capacities,  including  President  of 
the  Methodist  Conference,  1951. 

Yet  he  continued  to  be  also  an  author, 
writing  fifteen  books  in  all,  and  publishing 


78 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


a stream  of  pamphlets  and  tracts  along  with 
a regular  column  in  The  Methodist  Recorder. 
He  never  let  his  scholarship  lapse.  In  spite 
of  the  constant  harassments  of  the  executive 
responsibilities  he  carried,  he  never  lost  sight 
of  the  glory  of  preaching  and  of  the  indis- 
pensability of  the  preacher.  His  social  con- 
sciousness was  sharpened  and  deepened  dur- 
ing the  five  long  years  he  ministered  to  the 
victims  of  the  air  raids  in  the  basements  and 
tubes  of  London  and  some  of  the  little  vi- 
gnettes and  snapshots  recorded  by  his  son  are 
pictures  of  greatness.  Indeed  after  the  mess 
of  World  War  II  he  was  one  of  the  few 
prophetic  voices  in  Britain  who  tried  through 
a vast  “machinery”  of  prayer  cells  to  give 
spiritual  fibre  to  the  nation  and  to  fashion 
among  the  irregular  pieces  some  blueprint 
for  the  future. 

This  is  a lively  portrait,  for  Will  Sangster 
would  neither  fit  nor  desire  any  other.  For 
those  who  have  read  his  books  and  heard  him 
preach  at  his  best,  it  is  a memento  of  worthy 
dimensions.  If  any  weakness  appears  it  is  in 
the  lack  of  a more  definitive  review  of  the 
age — a fateful  era — during  which  Britain  ex- 
perienced a great  industrial  depression,  a 
terrible  war,  the  rise  of  Labor  to  political 
power,  and  a whole  plethora  of  social  and 
economic  revolutions,  but  as  a tribute  to  a 
man  of  great  and  varied  capacities  it  is  ade- 
quate. 

Donald  Macleod 

From  Out  of  the  West : Messages 
from  Western  Pulpits,  ed.  by  Paul  Jesse 
Baird.  The  Lantern  Press,  Stockton, 
California,  1962.  Pp.  156.  $3.95. 

This  book  is  a response  to  a felt  need.  “For 
many  years  it  has  been  felt  that  the  men  who 
fill  America’s  pulpits  in  the  West  were  not 
adequately  known  by  the  rest  of  the  Chris- 
tian Church,”  so  states  the  promotional  de- 
scription of  this  book.  The  result  has  been 
the  establishment  of  The  Lantern  Press  to 
be  “a  channel  for  publishing  the  message  of 
the  Church  of  the  West.”  This  initial  volume 
consists  of  a collection  of  sixteen  sermons  by 
leading  Presbyterian  ministers  in  the  general 
geographic  area  of  the  Pacific  Coast.  They 
are  a representative  group,  mostly  from  large 


churches,  with  a very  fair  distribution  among 
seminary  backgrounds  (Princeton,  6;  San 
Francisco,  4;  McCormick,  3;  Omaha,  1; 
Union,  N.Y.,  1;  Union,  Richmond,  1).  An 
interesting  feature  is  the  inclusion  of  a photo- 
graph of  each  preacher’s  church,  accom- 
panied by  data  about  its  size  and  develop- 
ment, and  a modest  biography  of  the  preacher 
himself.  The  contributors  range  from  such 
widely  known  names  as  Jesse  Hays  Baird 
and  Theodore  A.  Gill  to  others  who  although 
not  generally  familiar  yet  show  quality  and 
real  capacity  in  sermonic  art. 

This  is  an  ambitious  project  and  we  hope 
that  the  idealism  and  optimism  of  the  found- 
ers will  not  succumb  to  a box  office  chill. 
The  market  for  volumes  of  discrete  sermons 
is  not  brisk,  but  if  either  the  members  of  the 
churches  whose  ministers  are  represented 
here  purchase  copies  or  if  the  enterprise  is 
endowed,  then  the  continued  usefulness  of 
such  publications  will  be  sustained  and  as- 
sured. Those  of  us  who  deal  with  sermons 
in  the  classroom  welcome  it  as  another 
worthwhile  source  of  commendable  material. 

It  is  difficult  to  appraise  a volume,  written 
by  sixteen  different  men  who  have  no  ob- 
vious subject  pattern  or  theme  structure  in 
mind.  All  one  can  do  is  to  single  out  a few 
trends.  The  encouraging  feature  is  that  the 
sermons  are  generally  Biblical  although  a 
few  are  so  in  no  more  than  a sense  of  accom- 
modation. However,  the  return  to  Biblical 
studies  is  just  now  getting  to  the  pulpit  and 
therefore  this  criticism  may  be  more  unfair 
than  it  is  a good  omen.  Probably  the  best 
and  most  hopeful  characteristic  of  these  ser- 
mons is  that  the  Western  pulpit  is  critical  of 
itself  and  here  appears  its  growing  edge. 
These  are,  all  in  all,  good  average  sermons 
— interesting,  personal,  and  filled  with  hu- 
man concern — but  are  more  apt  to  tell  us 
more  about  what  these  preachers  are  doing 
than  what  they  are  thinking.  Are  they  read- 
ing theology?  With  some  exceptions  their 
frames  of  reference  are  more  frequently  nat- 
ural life  rather  than  the  supernatural.  Re- 
garding form,  their  homiletical  thinking  needs 
to  be  more  cogent  and  embodied  in  a more 
unified  thrust.  Harry  Emerson  Fosdick — as 
yet  without  peer  in  the  area  of  sermon  con- 
struction— was  able  to  state  the  essence  of 
his  sermon  in  one  sentence.  None  of  these 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


79 


critical  observations,  however,  are  intended 
to  deter  the  Western  group  from  going  on  to 
equally  useful  projects  in  the  general  area  of 
the  preaching  and  pastoral  ministry. 

Donald  Macleod 

The  Christian  Answer  (to  Life’s 
Urgent  Questions),  by  George  E.  Swea- 
zey.  Bethany  Press,  St.  Louis,  Mo., 
1962.  Pp.  192.  $3.50. 

An  earlier  volume,  Effective  Evangelism 
(Harper’s,  1953),  established  George  Swea- 
zey’s  reputation  as  a writer  and  thinker  of 
substantial  quality  at  a time  when  an  arm 
of  the  Church’s  program  of  witness  was  fall- 
ing victim  to  the  operations  of  the  hucksters. 

1 Today,  on  the  threshold  of  the  space  age, 
the  same  author  comes  to  us  as  preacher  with 
fifteen  sermonic  essays  of  unusual  perception 
and  relevance.  The  immediate  context  which 
prompted  these  pages  is  not  indicated,  but 
good  readers  will  gather  that  here  we  have 
an  able  and  sensitive  minister  of  the  Gospel 
giving  well  thought  out  answers  to  the  awk- 
ward and  embarrassing  questions  posed  by 
a secular  age  to  the  Christian  believer.  And 
the  messages  come  with  attractiveness  and 
force  because  the  literary  style  is  marked 
with  fresh  imagery,  contemporary  allusions, 
personal  situations ; and  because  facts  are  used 
instead  of  generalities,  we  see  constantly  the 
evidences  of  a well-informed  and  courageous 
mind. 

The  contents  are  gathered  under  a series  of 
questions  that  are  like  the  expansion  of  the 
main  divisions  of  a creed:  How  do  you  get 
hold  of  religion?  Where  am  I?  Who  is  God? 
Who  is  Jesus  Christ?  Where  does  the  Church 
fit  in?  How  is  the  Bible  the  Word  of  God? 
Each  of  these  questions  is  examined  astutely 
by  Dr.  Sweazey  who  has  an  uncanny  art  of 
turning  them  over  and  around  in  order  to 
see  the  pros  and  cons  of  every  facet.  His  dis- 
cussions sparkle  with  axioms  (“The  pure  in 
heart  shall  see  God;  the  impure  in  heart  do 
not  want  to  see  him,”  p.  30)  ; his  definitions 
are  revealing  (“Sin  is  like  an  offense  against 
someone  who  deserves  something  better  of 
us,”  p.  50)  ; indeed  some  of  his  marginal  re- 
marks reveal  the  depth  of  his  insights  and 
comprehension,  e.g.,  his  concise  treatment  of 


the  Roman  Catholic  Church  (pp.  131,  132), 
or  his  reflections  upon  theories  of  the  Atone- 
ment (p.  94).  In  short,  here  is  page  after 
page  of  high  and  thorough  thinking  upon 
the  great  tenets  of  our  common  faith. 

Some  may  find  Dr.  Sweazey  to  be  lacking 
in  an  over-all  smoothness  that  comes  from 
well-bridged  transitions  in  literary  form,  but 
more  will  be  abundantly  satisfied  to  have  in- 
vested in  a book  of  addresses  teeming  with 
ideas  that  have  matured  through  careful 
processes  of  the  mind. 

Donald  Macleod 

Proclaiming  Christ  Today,  by  W. 
Norman  Pittenger.  Seabury  Press, 
Greenwich,  Conn.,  1962.  Pp.  148.  $3.50. 

Here  is  a book  on  preaching,  written  by 
an  Anglican  as  a series  of  lectures  for  An- 
glicans and  from  an  Anglican  point  of  view, 
yet  sufficiently  broad  in  its  message  to  have 
a measure  of  timeliness  for  the  Reformed 
traditions.  Professor  Pittenger,  a member  of 
the  faculty  of  General  Theological  Seminary, 
New  York,  has  an  established  reputation  as 
a writer  and  scholar  in  his  own  field,  Chris- 
tian apologetics,  and  for  this  reason  his 
thoughts  on  preaching  will  be  read  with  more 
than  passing  interest.  He  writes  in  a clear, 
sober  style,  and  his  content  indicates  wide 
reading,  not  only  in  his  own  ecclesiastical 
tradition  but  also  among  sources  Catholic 
and  ecumenical. 

In  the  course  of  six  solid  chapters,  the 
author  covers  the  nature  of  the  Gospel  we 
preach,  the  context  of  its  proclamation,  its 
hearers  and  the  obstacles  to  contemporary 
communication,  and  the  need  for  an  authentic 
spiritual  accent  in  our  encounter  with  the  pat- 
terns of  secular  thought.  For  an  Anglican  his 
appreciation  of  the  office  of  preaching  is  high, 
for  he  sees  its  indispensability  for  the  act 
of  worship  as  much  as  the  necessity  of  the 
latter  as  a context  for  the  former.  He  has 
something  to  say  of  real  consequence  regard- 
ing issues  that  confuse  and  scare,  many 
preachers  today : the  cult  of  scientism,  the 
communication  of  neo-orthodoxy,  Bultmann’s 
demythologizing,  miracles,  the  finality  of  the 
Christian  faith,  and  the  right  focus  of  evan- 
gelistic preaching. 


8o 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


This  is  not  a profound  book,  but  it  can  be 
read  with  profit  a second  time.  Professors  of 
preaching  should  list  it  as  required  reading. 
Parish  ministers  will  find  in  it  a fresh  orien- 
tation of  their  primary  task — the  ministry  of 
preaching. 

Donald  Macleod 


GENERAL 

Through  the  Valley  of  the  Kwai,  by 
Ernest  Gordon.  Harper  & Brothers, 
New  York,  1962.  Pp.  257.  $3.95. 

One  valid  test  for  a good  book  is  to  ask 
whether  or  not  it  sharpens  the  vision  and 
enlarges  the  sympathies  of  the  reader.  By 
this  standard,  Ernest  Gordon’s  narrative  of 
his  prison  experiences  along  the  River  Kwai 
during  World  War  II  is  an  unusually  good 
book.  It  whets  one’s  sensitivities  to  the  prob- 
lems and  meaning  of  life  as  no  book  that  I 
have  read  recently. 

In  good  epic  fashion,  it  begins  in  medias 
res,  with  Gordon  lying  in  the  morgue  end 
of  the  Death  House  of  the  Japanese  prison 
camp  at  Chungkai,  Thailand.  Like  many  a 
soldier  in  the  C.B.I.  Theater,  he  had  had  his 
share  of  diseases — malaria,  beriberi,  diph- 
theria, amoebic  dysentery.  Now  he  had  diph- 
theria. A long  flashback  brings  us  up  to  date. 
Gordon  was  a company  commander  in  the 
93rd  Highlanders,  one  of  the  battalions  that 
were  decimated  in  the  bloody  haul  through 
Malaya  and  over  the  causeway  to  Singapore. 
From  Singapore  he  had  made  his  way  to 
Padang  in  Sumatra,  where  he  and  nine  other 
men  began  an  escape  odyssey  on  a fifty-foot 
prahu  named  the  Setia  Berganti.  The  ill- 
starred  flight  had  ended  several  hundred 
miles  out  in  the  Indian  Ocean,  where  the 
Setia  Berganti  was  stopped  by  a Japanese 
warship.  The  men  had  then  been  sent  to  a 
succession  of  prison  compounds,  Gordon  ar- 
riving finally  at  Chungkai,  near  which  were 
being  built,  mostly  by  the  labor  of  coolies  and 
P.O.W.’s,  the  jungle  railroad  and  famous 
bridge  over  the  River  Kwai. 

The  atrocities  of  the  concentration  camp 
are  brought  freshly  to  mind.  None  of  these, 
however,  is  made  to  seem  so  terrible  as  the 
moral  and  spiritual  degradation  of  men  un- 
der the  pressures  of  servitude,  deprivation  and 


disease.  All  hope  seems  to  have  gone  out  of 
life.  Stealing  and  cheating  became  the  norms 
of  behavior  toward  one’s  own  fellow  sol- 
diers. Whole  sentences  were  composed  in 
which  every  word  was  a curse  word. 

But  then,  when  the  long  night  was  at  its 
darkest,  the  prisoners  at  Chungkai  began 
to  witness  what  Gordon  calls  “the  miracle 
by  the  River  Kwai.”  Compassion  began  to 
return.  Men  who  were  still  able  to  get  about 
and  to  work  began  to  take  an  interest  in  the 
sick  and  the  dying.  Gordon  was  carried  to  a 
little  bamboo  shack  of  his  own,  where  he 
was  daily  visited  by  a young  man  who  bathed 
him,  cleaned  his  sores  and  massaged  his 
paralyzed  legs.  Before  long,  he  was  walking 
again — and  ministering  to  others.  The  steal- 
ing and  the  cheating  stopped.  Circulating  li- 
braries were  started,  and  a jungle  university 
was  initiated — with  no  records,  no  adminis- 
tration and  no  salaried  professors.  The  men 
began  to  talk  about  God,  and  about  the  mean- 
ing of  redemption.  Eventually  a little  chapel 
was  built — a church  without  walls,  but  with 
a crudely  fashioned  altar,  a bamboo  cross, 
and  a vessel  made  from  a tin  can  with  a shoe 
lace  for  a wick. 

Gordon’s  book  is  essentially  about  this  mir- 
acle. It  is  about  the  recovery  of  heroism 
and  self-respect  and  laughter.  It  is  about  the 
rediscovery  of  God.  The  title  phrase,  Through 
the  Valley  of  the  Kwai,  is  not,  as  I suspected 
before  reading  the  book,  a play  for  popular 
identification  with  Pierre  Boulle’s  already 
famous  Bridge  over  the  River  Kwai.  In- 
stead, it  is  a fitting  allusion  to  the  Twenty- 
third  Psalm’s  “through  the  valley  of  the 
shadow  of  death.”  Many  of  the  P.O.W.’s  in 
the  Japanese  death-camps  sank  even  beyond 
the  desire  to  live.  The  miracle  was  that  they 
were  brought  back — first  to  the  desire  and 
then  to  life. 

Though  he  tries,  as  humbly  as  a Scotsman 
knows  how,  to  stay  in  the  background  through 
most  of  the  narrative,  it  is  evident  that  the 
miracle  had  a great  effect  upon  Gordon  him- 
self. When  the  war  was  over,  he,  along  with 
hundreds  of  other  Jocks  and  G.I.’s,  entered 
theological  school  to  study  for  the  ministry. 
He  is  now  Dean  of  the  Chapel  at  Princeton 
University,  where  he  says  that  he  witnesses 
the  miracle  he  first  saw  in  the  jungle  “being 
repeated  daily  on  the  campus — the  miracle  of 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


81 


God  at  work  in  His  world.”  The  final  chap- 
ter, in  which  Gordon  traces  the  postwar  his- 
tories of  some  of  the  P.O.W.’s  and  comments 
upon  postwar  conditions  generally,  is,  in  my 
opinion,  one  of  the  best. 

There  are  a number  of  minor  scenes  in  the 
book  that  are  played  out  unduly.  If  they  were 
condensed  and  the  prose  were  tighter,  the 
action  would  be  more  gripping.  The  reader 
is  almost  always  conscious  that  the  author  is 
not  a professional  writer.  (This  is  bad,  but 
it  is  also  good — one  comes  to  detest  “slick- 
ness” in  a book  of  this  sort.)  There  are 
numerous  inept  phrasings,  such  as  this  sen- 
tence: “We  were  slipping  rapidly  down  the 
scale  of  degradation.”  But  there  is  also  some 
good  and  subtle  prose,  as  in  this  example : 
“Flies  clustered  on  his  nose  and  mouth.  Then 
I knew  that  he  was  dead.” 

There  is  naturally  some  question  about  the 
accuracy  of  the  reporting  of  certain  events 
and  conversations  after  nearly  two  decades — 
especially  since  Gordon  has  testified  that  his 
diary  was  confiscated  by  the  Japanese.  Is 
this  really  what  happened  and  what  was  said, 
or  is  it  what  twenty  years  have  done  to  what 
happened  and  what  was  said?  Still,  some 
latitude  must  be  permitted,  as  it  is  to  any 
chronicler.  (One  cannot  help  wondering 
whether  the  misquotation  of  Tennyson  on  p. 
22  was  “Limey’s”  or  the  author’s.) 

But  I have  said  that  this  is  a good  book 
because  it  engages  the  sensitivities  and  widens 
the  sympathies,  and  it  is.  No  reader  can  fail 
to  be  impressed  by  the  indomitable  spirit  of 
these  thousands  of  prisoners  of  war,  who, 
having  made  their  descensus  ad  inferos,  came 
back  to  sanity  and  health  and  love,  or  by  the 
graciousness  of  the  God  whom  they  praised 
for  their  return.  Archibald  MacLeish  may 
have  been  right  when  he  said  that  “A  poem 
should  not  mean,  but  be.”  This  reviewer, 
however,  is  always  happy  to  come  across  a 
book  that  means.  Ernest  Gordon’s  book  does. 

John  Killinger 

Hear  the  Word;  A Novel  about  Eli- 
jah and  Elisha,  by  Heinrich  Zador. 
McGraw-Hill,  New  York,  1962.  Pp. 
286.  $4.95. 

For  several  years  now  we  have  been  com- 


plaining mightily  about  the  two-dimensional- 
ism  of  contemporary  literature.  Where,  we 
have  asked  again  and  again,  may  the  nu- 
minous any  longer  be  found? 

Here  is  a book  to  answer  that  complaint. 
G.  Ernest  Wright  himself  never  wrote  more 
dynamically  about  the  Word  of  the  Lord 
than  has  Heinrich  Zador,  the  Budapest-born 
music  critic,  author  and  Zionist  who  emi- 
grated to  Palestine  in  1939.  Here,  in  an 
imaginative  account  of  the  prophetic  minis- 
tries of  Elijah  and  Elisha,  is  a real  attempt 
to  deal  sensitively  with  the  concept  of  “word” 
as  “event” — because  God  speaks,  things  hap- 
pen. The  German  title,  Die  Erfiillung,  ex- 
presses it  more  graphically  than  the  Eng- 
lish. 

Nor  does  the  novel  fail,  because  it  is  so 
concerned  with  the  divine,  to  be  human.  In 
fact,  it  illustrates  again  the  insight  of  the 
first  words  of  Calvin’s  Institutes,  that  man 
is  known  most  truly  when  viewed  in  relation 
to  God.  The  portrait  of  Elisha  as  a penitent 
because  the  Word  has  used  him  despite  his 
unworthiness — the  climactic  moment  of  the 
novel — is  especially  compelling.  The  “infi- 
nite qualitative  distance”  was  never  expressed 
in  better  terms. 

It  must  be  admitted  that  there  is  an  ap- 
parent unevenness  in  Zador’s  performance. 
Some  readers  will  doubtless  feel  that  in  try- 
ing to  rest  his  plot  on  both  Elijah  and  Eli- 
sha he  has  fallen  between  the  stools.  The 
Elisha  section  is  more  fully  and  imagina- 
tively developed  than  the  Elijah  part.  Con- 
sequently the  last  half  or  three-quarters  of 
the  novel  is  much  more  absorbing  than  the 
first. 

Few  writers  would  have  the  courage  to 
split  a novel  between  two  major  characters. 
But  Zador  is  driving  at  something  by  doing 
it.  It  is  not  Elijah  and  Elisha  who  get  top 
billing,  but  God!  The  Word,  the  dabar  Jah- 
weh,  abides  behind  every  scene  as  the  ultimate 
reality.  Therefore  what  matter  if  the  story 
be  divided  among  the  lesser  dramatis  per- 
sonae, who  are  but  shadows  in  comparison? 

Perhaps  this  points  up  the  real  problem 
of  any  biblical-type  narrative  in  our  day.  It 
must  bridge  an  almost  unspannable  gulf  from 
the  biblical  Zeitgeist  to  the  modern.  The 
same  was  true  of  Thomas  Mann’s  Joseph 
and  His  Brothers,  the  reviewers  of  which, 


82 


THE  PRINCETON  SEMINARY  BULLETIN 


as  Amos  Wilder  has  observed,  were  hard  put 
to  appear  oriented,  because  the  Old  Testa- 
ment material  is  so  basically  counter  to  the 
cut  of  the  contemporary  mind.  Few  people 
are  genuinely  sympathetic  to  the  idiom  of 
biblical  thought — including  the  idea  of  “word” 
as  “event.” 


These  few,  however,  will  appreciate  Za- 
dor’s  novel,  and  the  world  of  wonder  it  un- 
folds. The  rest — well,  Kierkegaard  had  the 
word  for  them  when  he  said  that  there  ought 
to  be  asylums  for  people  who  are  always 
sane  and  logical. 

John  Killinger